JP6862066B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of controlling a transition to an advantageous state favorable to the player.

When a game ball (an example of a game medium) wins a prize in a predetermined area provided on the game board, the game machine determines whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player, and this determination is made. If the result is affirmative, there is something that shifts to a specific gaming state.
In this specific game state, the variable winning device provided on the game board executes a round game in which the game is closed a predetermined number of times and then is closed. By winning a prize, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out.
In such a game machine, when the first and second variable winning devices are provided, the second variable winning device is provided with a V zone (an example of a specific area), and the game ball wins a prize in the V zone during the specific gaming state, Probability variable gaming state in which the probability of transition to the specific gaming state is relatively high after the end of this specific gaming state, that is, the probability variation game in which the probability of transition to the specific gaming state is higher than that of the non-probability variation game state. A gaming machine that shifts to a state has been proposed (see Patent Document 1).
In the above-mentioned game machine, the upper and lower variable winning devices may be opened alternately during the specific gaming state, and the lower variable winning device in which the upper variable winning device is closed and flows down is changed to the open state. By winning the winning device, it is designed so that there is no situation in which the game ball does not win after the variable winning device at the top is closed.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-57892

However, such a game machine has caused a decline in interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing a decrease in interest.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention
A variable winning device that can be displaced into a first state in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted, and has a specific area through which the game medium can pass.
A passing area through which the game medium can pass,
An opening / closing member that can be displaced into an open state in which the game medium easily passes through the passing region and a closed state in which the game medium does not easily pass through.
A display means capable of variablely displaying the identification information based on the passage of the game medium through the passage area, and
On condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific mode, the game state transition control means capable of controlling the transition to the jackpot game state advantageous to the player, and the game state transition control means.
A round game executing means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning device is displaced to the first state and the second state in the jackpot game state shifted by the control of the game state transition control means.
In the jackpot game state transitioned by the control of the game state transition control means, the end of the jackpot game state is based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the round game executed by the round game execution means. Later, a probabilistic gaming state control means capable of controlling a probabilistic gaming state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in the specific mode is relatively high ,
And probability that can be controlled to a relatively low non-probability variation gaming state non probability variation gaming state control means for identification information is displayed stopped in the specific embodiments prior Symbol display means,
A time reduction gaming state control means capable of controlling the time reduction gaming state including state easy pre Symbol closing member is relatively open,
Non-including a state in which the opening / closing member is relatively unlikely to be in the open state when the number of times the identification information is variablely displayed after being controlled to the time-saving game state by the time-saving game state control means reaches the first number. Non-time-saving game state control means that can control the time-saving game state,
With
When the gaming medium passes through the specific area and is controlled to the probabilistic gaming state by the probabilistic gaming state control means after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the first probabilistic gaming state and the time-saving gaming state can be controlled. It is possible and
It is possible to control the non-probability variation game state and the time-saving game state of the second number of times, which is larger than the first number of times , without the game medium passing through the specific area .
After performing the recognition difficult is directed stop table示種 another identification information from the performance, being capable of performing recognition easy is directed stop table示種by the identification information from the performance,
The same effect can be performed regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific area.
It is determined whether or not the easy-to-recognize effect is executed depending on whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific area.
In the jackpot gaming state transitioned by the control of the game state transition control means, the gaming medium is directed toward the specific region before the gaming medium passes through the specific region during the jackpot gaming state. It is characterized by being able to perform a specific effect that encourages the launch of.
The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention
A game board with a game area and
A variable winning device that can be displaced into a first state in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted, and has a specific area through which the game medium can pass.
A passing area through which the game medium can pass,
An opening / closing member that can be displaced into an open state in which the game medium easily passes through the passing region and a closed state in which the game medium does not easily pass through.
A display means capable of variablely displaying the identification information based on the passage of the game medium through the passage area, and
On condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific mode, the game state transition control means capable of controlling the transition to the jackpot game state advantageous to the player, and the game state transition control means.
A round game executing means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning device is displaced to the first state and the second state in the big hit game state shifted by the control of the game state transition control means.
In the jackpot game state transitioned by the control of the game state transition control means, after the end of the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the round game executed by the round game execution means. , A probabilistic gaming state control means capable of controlling a probabilistic gaming state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode on the display means is relatively high.
In the jackpot game state transitioned by the control of the game state transition control means, the jackpot game state is based on the fact that the game medium did not pass through the specific area in the round game executed by the round game execution means. After the end, the non-probability changing game state control means capable of controlling the non-probability changing game state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific mode is relatively low, and the non-probability changing game state control means.
After the end of the jackpot game state that is shifted by the control of the game state transition control means, the time-saving game state control means that can control the time-saving game state including the state in which the opening / closing member tends to be relatively open,
The opening / closing member is relatively opened on condition that the number of times the identification information is variablely displayed by the display means after being controlled to the time-saving game state by the time-saving game state control means reaches a specific number of times. Non-time-saving game state control means that can control non-time-saving game states including difficult states,
With
When the gaming medium passes through the specific area and is controlled to the probabilistic gaming state by the probabilistic gaming state control means after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to control the probabilistic gaming state and the time-saving gaming state of the specific number of times. And
When the game medium does not pass through the specific area and the non-probability changing game state is controlled by the non-probability changing game state control means after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the non-probability changing game state and the time-saving gaming state of the specific number of times are controlled. It is possible to
It has an effect mode that can be executed after the end of the big hit game state in both the case where the game medium passes through the specific area and the case where the game medium does not pass through the specific area.
When a special mode different from the specific mode is displayed in the effect mode, the game state in the effect mode is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state depending on whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific area. Is characterized by making it possible to discriminate.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention
A game board with a game area and
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area,
The first passage area through which the game medium that rolls in the game area can pass, and
A first displacement member that can be displaced to a first position that facilitates the passage of the game medium through the first passage region and a second position that makes it difficult.
A game medium that rolls in the game area can pass through, and a second pass area provided at a predetermined interval with respect to the first pass area, and a second pass area.
A second displacement member that can be displaced to a first position that facilitates the passage of the game medium through the second passage region and a second position that makes it difficult.
A game medium that rolls in the game area can pass through, and a third pass area provided between the first pass area and the second pass area and a third pass area.
A third displacement member that can be displaced to a first position that facilitates the passage of the game medium into the third passage region and a second position that makes it difficult.
A specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition,
A game state control means for controlling the specific game state and a game state control means for controlling the specific game state on condition that a positive judgment is made by the specific game state transition determination means.
A first advantageous game execution means capable of executing a first advantageous game in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are controlled to the first position a predetermined number of times in a specific game state controlled by the game state control means.
In the specific game state controlled by the game state control means, the second advantageous game execution means capable of executing the second advantageous game in which the third displacement member is controlled to the first position a predetermined number of times, and the second advantageous game execution means.
With
The specific game state controlled by the game state control means includes a specific game state in which the first advantageous game is executed, the second advantageous game is executed, and then the first advantageous game can be executed.
When the game medium is launched in a predetermined direction by the launching means, it can pass over the first passing region, then through the third passing region, and then pass over the second passing region.

According to this configuration, in the specific gaming state, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are controlled to the first position, then the third displacement member is controlled to the first position, and then the first displacement member and the second displacement member are controlled. It is possible to control the displacement member to the first position. Further, the game medium can pass over the first passing region, then through the third passing region, and then pass over the second passing region. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game medium that did not pass through the first passing region when the first displacement member is in the first position from being dropped by the third passing region, and further, the first 3 It is possible to prevent the game medium that did not pass through the third passing region when the displacement member is in the first position from being dropped by the second passing region. In this way, in the specific game state, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the player loses the game, which is disadvantageous to the player, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention further includes a game medium that has passed through the first pass region and / or a specific region through which the game medium that has passed through the second pass region can pass.
A variable member that can vary between an easy-to-pass state in which the game medium can easily pass through a specific area and a difficult-to-pass state in which it is difficult to pass.
Specified after the end of the specific game state based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area during the first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means in the specific game state controlled by the game state control means. A special game state control means that can control a special game state that is easily determined to shift to a specific game state by the game state transition determination means, and a special game state control means.
With
The first advantageous game executed by the first advantageous game execution means includes
When the time for the first displacement member and the second displacement member to be displaced to the first position is specified as the first time in total, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are displaced to the first position. , A difficult-to-pass advantage game in which the variable members are specified to be in a state where they can easily pass for the second time in total.
The time for the first displacement member and the second displacement member to be displaced to the first position is defined as the third time, which is the total time of the first time or less, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member are in the first position. Includes an easy-to-pass advantage game, in which the variable members are defined to be in an easy-to-pass state for a fourth time, which is longer than the second time in total, when displaced.
The specific game state controlled by the game state control means includes
A first specific game state in which the first advantageous game executing means executes only the easy-to-pass advantageous game a predetermined number of times, and the second advantageous game executing means executes the second advantageous game a predetermined number of times.
A second specific game state in which the first advantageous game executing means executes only the difficult-to-pass advantageous game a predetermined number of times and the second advantageous game executing means executes the second advantageous game a predetermined number of times is included. ..

In this configuration, a first specific game state in which it is difficult for the game medium to pass through the specific area and a second specific game state in which the game medium can easily pass through the specific area are provided, and the game medium passes through in the first specific game state. The time that can pass through the area is the first time, and in the second specific gaming state, the time that can pass through the passing area is the third time that is equal to or less than the first time. As described above, in the first specific game state in which it is difficult for the game medium to pass through the specific area, the time during which the game medium can pass through the pass area is not shorter than in the second specific game state in which the game medium can easily pass through the specific area. Therefore, by providing a point that is not disadvantageous in the first specific gaming state as compared with the second specific gaming state, it is possible to further improve the interest.

The gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention further includes a fourth passing region through which a gaming medium that rolls in the gaming region can pass.
A fourth displacement member that can be displaced to a first position that facilitates the passage of the game medium into the fourth passage region and a second position that makes it difficult.
A fifth passage area through which the game medium that rolls in the game area can pass, and
A fifth displacement member that can be displaced to a first position that facilitates the passage of the game medium into the fifth passage region and a second position that makes it difficult.
With
The first pass area or the second pass area is arranged between the third pass area and the fourth pass area.
The fourth passage area is
When the first passing area is arranged between the third passing area and the fourth passing area, it is arranged between the first passing area and the fifth passing area.
When the second pass area is arranged between the third pass area and the fourth pass area, it is arranged between the second pass area and the fifth pass area.
The first advantageous game executing means can control the first displacement member, the second displacement member, and the fifth displacement member to the first position a predetermined number of times as the first advantageous game.
The second advantageous game executing means is characterized in that, as the second advantageous game, the third displacement member and the fourth displacement member can be controlled to the first position a predetermined number of times.

According to this configuration, in the specific gaming state, the first displacement member, the second displacement member, and the fifth displacement member are set to the first position, and the third displacement member and the fourth displacement member are set to the first position. Control is possible alternately. In this way, in the specific game state, by preventing the game medium that did not pass through the passing region when the displacement members are in the first position from being dropped, a disadvantage for the player that the displacement members are missed occurs. Since the situation can be further reduced, it is possible to further improve the interest.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest.

It is external perspective view of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the game board in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning device mechanism of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the spec of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1-round opening and closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1-round opening and closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the hit pattern 1 and the hit pattern 4 of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the hit pattern 2 and the hit pattern 3 of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the hit pattern 7 and the hit pattern 8 of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram which shows the game state and the effect mode of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd start port switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prize opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol control processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation time management process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting time management process before reopening of the big winning opening of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of the big winning opening of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval management process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interrupt processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit effect pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the V prize notification processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during a round of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the inter-round effect processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st effect mode change process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd effect mode change process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge error notification processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect screen and effect screen flow in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect screen and effect screen flow in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect screen and effect screen flow in the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning device mechanism of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning device mechanism of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning device mechanism of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the spec of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the 1-round opening and closing pattern of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member operation pattern of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the game state determination table of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition diagram which shows the game state and the effect mode of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big prize opening switch check process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of the big winning opening of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end interval management process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit effect pattern determination process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the V prize notification processing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during a round of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the inter-round effect processing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end effect processing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect mode change process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect screen and effect screen flow in the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the effect screen and effect screen flow in the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the winning device mechanism of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board used in the game machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a winning device mechanism of the game machine. FIG. 6 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of the present embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

[Structure of game machine]
First, the structure of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 6.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko game machine according to the present embodiment has a main body frame base to which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which a game ball can roll and flow is detachably provided. A main body frame 2 provided with a plate 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base) and a front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) in which the game board 1 can be visually recognized. A front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (referred to as a player), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing a predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3). Is provided with a detachable rear frame base plate (not shown), and a rear frame (not shown) rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 behind the main body frame 2 (on the anti-player side). ing.

The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via an outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via the main body frame hinge 2b. Note that FIG. 1 shows a state in which the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 and the main body frame 2 is closed with respect to the outer frame 6. In such a state, the rear frame is , Because it is housed in the outer frame 6, it is not shown.

The front frame 3 has a front frame base plate 3a and various front frame constituent members provided in the front frame base plate 3a. The front frame constituent members include a protective glass 7, a dish unit 8, an operation unit 9, speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (top decoration 14, right side decorative member 15, left side decorative member 16) and the like. The table frame constituent members are not limited to these, and include all the members that constitute the front frame 3. Further, in the plate unit 8, each cover member (upper plate upper cover 8a, lower plate cover 8b, etc.) is attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

In the front frame 3, a protective glass 7 having transparency is provided in the above-mentioned front frame opening 3h. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3h (window portion) provided in the front frame base plate 3a provided in the front frame 3 from the back surface side (rear side) of the front frame base plate 3a. In a state where the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, it is configured to face the front surface (front surface) side of the game board 1 and cover the surface (front surface) side thereof. In the upper part of the front frame 3, speakers 10a and 10b for producing a sound effect are provided on both upper sides of the front frame opening 3h.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance is provided so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of the decorative member, a top decoration 14 incorporating a patrol lamp accessory described later is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and a light emitting display mode is provided on the left and right sides of the front frame opening 3h. A right side decorative member 15 (for example, an upper right lens 15a, a right middle lens 15b, a right panel cover 15c, etc.) and a left side decorative member 16 (for example, a left outer lens 16a, etc.) that can be changed are provided.

Inside the right-side decorative member 15 and the left-side decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp, LED 27, etc.) controlled by a sub-control circuit 70 (see FIG. 7) described later is provided (see FIG. 7). .. The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16, and is perceived by the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16 as synchrotron radiation or diffused light having an excellent appearance. As a result, it is possible to change the display mode by light, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a dish unit 8 is provided below the front frame opening 3h of the front frame base plate 3a. The plate unit 8 includes an upper plate 17 for storing rental balls and prize balls, and a lower plate 18 provided below the upper plate 17 and capable of storing, for example, game balls overflowing when the upper plate 17 is full. Is provided.

The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing game balls, and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper plate 17 includes an upper plate main body 17p capable of storing game balls, and an upper plate upper cover 8a detachably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper portion of the upper plate main body 17p. It is provided with an upper plate decorative member for improving the aesthetic appearance of the upper plate 17. As an example of the upper plate decorative member, the upper plate main body 17p is provided with an upper plate left decoration 17a, an upper plate front decoration 17c, and the like so as to surround the upper plate upper cover 8a. Has a shape bent from the left side of the upper plate upper cover 8a to the lower plate 18 from the middle toward the right side via the front side.

The front frame base plate 3a has a payout port 20 for paying out the game balls to the upper plate 17, and a discharge port for discharging the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 to the back side of the front plate base plate 3a (not shown). ) And a supply port 21 for supplying the game ball discharged from the discharge port to the lower plate 18. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, there is a ball passage for a game ball to be discharged from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 7), and a ball passage cover (illustrated) for forming a ball passage by communicating the discharge port and the supply port 21. (Omitted) is provided. When the game ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the game ball is sent to the upper plate 17 through the payout port 20, while the upper plate 17 is so large that the game ball stays near the payout port 20 although the game ball is paid out. When the ball is full or when the ball removal button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 are moved from the discharge port through the ball passage and the supply port 21 to the lower plate. It is sent to 18.

In the present embodiment, the plating member is used for the decoration of the front surface of the game machine, and the plating member 17b is also used for the upper plate front decoration 17c that decorates the front surface portion of the upper plate 17. By using the plated member 17b, the decorative effect of the appearance design of the game machine is enhanced to improve the interest of the player.

The upper plate cover 8a has a ball lending button 23 for receiving a ball lending, a return button 24 for returning a card from a card unit 84 (see FIG. 7) for lending a game ball (not shown), and the like. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player operating (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game. The arrangement configuration (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9 is not particularly limited, but as an example in the drawing, the push operation button 9A is projected vertically from the upper plate upper cover 8a, and the outer circumference of the push operation button 9A is projected. The operation unit 9 configured to arrange the jog dial 9B is shown in.

Regarding the front frame 3, the portion of the surface (front surface) on the left side (that is, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) from the player side is illegal, for example, a piano wire or the like. It is possible to assume a situation in which a member is invaded and a fraudulent act is performed by the fraudulent member with respect to various configurations constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the portion.

Therefore, in order to prevent such fraudulent activity, a cover member with a wiring holding function (not shown) is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 at a portion where the above-mentioned fraudulent member invades. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion for holding wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion for covering a substrate (not shown) constructed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an illegal member such as a piano wire. It is configured by integrating with the fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, since it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function having three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering, and fraud prevention, it is necessary to separately prepare a member for each of these functions. The cost can be reduced accordingly.

The main body frame 2 has a main body frame base plate 2a and various main body frame constituent members provided in the main body frame base plate 2a. The main body frame constituent members include a launching device 26, a speaker 10c, various control boards / relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

In the main body frame 2, a main body frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3h is provided at a predetermined position of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the front frame opening 3h. At the same time, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching device 26 for launching a game ball is provided on the lower right side of the main body frame opening.

The launching device 26 includes a panel body 26a for arranging the launching device 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a, a launching handle 26b arranged on the front side of the panel body 26a, and a panel body 26a. It is arranged on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a facing the back side of the body frame, and is provided with a launch drive device (not shown) for launching a game ball. In addition, the launching device 26 realizes the launching means.

A notch 3p for exposing the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) to the player side is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 3. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) is exposed through the notch 3p of the front frame 3 and is adjacent to the dish unit 8 described above. Positioned. Such a launching device 26 (panel body 26a, launching handle 26b) and the dish unit 8 exhibit an aesthetic appearance as if they were continuously integrated with each other.

The launch handle 26b is provided in a support portion (not shown), a handle gup 26d that is rotatably attached to the support portion and can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise, and a game. It is arranged so as to cover the launch stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the ball, the launch stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) for turning the launch stop switch ON / OFF, and the opening of the handle grip 26d. It is equipped with a handle cap 26h.

When the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b is rotated in the clockwise direction, the driving force of the launching drive device is increased or decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle), and the driving force at that time is stored in the upper plate 17. The game ball being played is launched toward the game area 1p (see FIG. 3) of the game board 1. At this time, when the launch stop button 26e is operated, the launch drive device is stopped and controlled, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

In the present embodiment, the payout / launch control circuit 82 (see FIG. 7) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 7) controls the operation of the launch stop switch and the launch handle 26b. Inside the launching device 26, a spring member (not shown) for elastically urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction is provided, and the player can make the spring member elastic. The game ball is launched by rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction. The firing interval of the game ball is 0.66 seconds.

When the player interrupts the game and releases the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the starting position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the launch of the game ball is stopped by pressing the launch stop button 26e by the protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d.

Here, as a method of increasing or decreasing the firing intensity of the game ball, the resistance value of the firing volume (not shown) is changed according to the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the firing handle 26b, and the firing solenoid (not shown). It is known that the firing intensity of the game ball is increased or decreased by changing the electric power supplied to (omitted). However, in the launching device 26 of the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b is performed. A firing spring (not shown) interlocking with the firing spring (not shown) and a gear mechanism (not shown) for winding (tightening) the firing spring are provided. In the launching device 26, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip 26d of the launching handle 26b, and the degree of winding (tightening) of the launching spring is increased or decreased to increase or decrease the degree of winding (tightening) of the launching spring. The firing intensity of is changed to increase or decrease.

The speaker 10c is provided in the center of the lower part of the main body frame 2 so as to produce a sound effect. The sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through the speaker cover 10k provided in the portion of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, the portion between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). It has become.

The game board 1 is arranged in front of the rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down. doing. The game board 1 is made of a material having translucency (for example, polycarbonate or the like), but may be formed of a material having no translucency such as plywood or the like.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 6, the game board 1 includes a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first starting port 32, a second starting port 33, a blade member 34 for opening and closing the second starting port 33, and a passing gate 35. 1st big winning opening 36A, 1st big winning opening 36B, 2nd big winning opening 37A, 1st big winning opening shutter 361A to open and close the 1st big winning opening 36A, 1st big winning opening 36B to open and close Specified area 38A and non-specific area 38B, discharge ports 38X, 38Y, specified below the winning opening shutter 361B, the second special winning opening 37A, the second large winning opening shutter 371A, and the first large winning opening 36A. Displacement member 39 that opens and closes the area 38A, a plurality of general winning openings 40, out openings 41, upper movable effect member 42A, lower movable effect member 42B, cover member 43, rolling area 372 provided in the cover member 43, liquid crystal display. The device 4 and the LED unit 5 are provided. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting port 32, the second starting port 33, the passing gate 35, the first big winning opening 36A, the first big winning opening 36B, the second big winning opening 37A, the specific area A winning area is formed by 38A and the general winning opening 40. Note that FIG. 3 shows a state in which the cover member 43 is removed. In the present embodiment, the first large winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B are appropriately referred to as the first large winning opening 36.

The guide rail 30 is composed of an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is arranged so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper part of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is arranged inside the outer rail on the left side of the game board 1. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side thereof.

The stage 31 distributes the flow-down region of the game ball in the game region 1p, and is arranged along the lower edge portion of the liquid crystal display device 4.

The game ball launched by the launching device 26 flows down toward the lower side of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) driven into the game board 1 or a stage 31 or the like. In this process, the game ball wins one of the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the first big winning opening 36A, the first big winning opening 36B, the second big winning opening 37A, and the general winning opening 40. If the prize is not won, or if the prize is not won after passing through the passing gate 35, the prize is discharged from the out port 41.

The winning means that the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area, a favorable situation for the player (for example, opening of the second starting port 33, a symbol lottery, a prize ball, etc., which will be described later) is given. Means to do. At this time, the passage of the winning area by the game ball means a mere passage, and the entry of the winning area by the game ball means that the game ball is collected separately from the out opening 41. Since the winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, passing and entering the ball are substantially synonymous. Therefore, both passing and winning a game ball in the winning area lead to winning. Therefore, in the following explanation, unless otherwise specified, "passing" and "winning" have the same meaning for the winning area. Use. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, it may be referred to as "V winning".

When the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively small, the launching force applied to the game ball is generally small, so that the game ball mainly flows down the left side of the stage 31. Further, when the rotation angle of the launch handle 26b is relatively large, the launching force given to the game ball is generally large, so that the game ball mainly flows down the right side of the stage 31. In general, a method of hitting a game ball flowing down to the left side of the stage 31 is called "left-handed hitting", and a method of hitting a game ball flowing down to the right side of the stage 31 is called "right-handed hitting". A game ball launched by "right-handed" (an example of a game medium launched in a predetermined direction) basically flows down the right side of the stage 31 and reaches the first grand prize opening shutter 361A, and the first When the big winning opening shutter 361A, the second big winning opening shutter 371A, and the first big winning opening shutter 361B are closed, the first big winning opening shutter 361A, the rolling area 372, and the first big winning opening shutter 361B It will roll over in sequence.

The first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 give an opportunity for a lottery on the condition that the game ball wins (enters), and displays the result of the lottery in the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4. It gives an opportunity to make it happen. In addition, the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 realize a passing region.

The first starting port 32 is provided at a substantially lower position in the center of the game board 1. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 32, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected by the first starting port switch 320 (see FIG. 7).

The second starting port 33 is provided directly below the first starting port 32. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 33, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 via the payout port 20 or the supply port 21. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 33 is determined by the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected by the second starting port switch 330 (see FIG. 7).

The blade member 34 opens and closes so as to form a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is in an open state that enables the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 33 and a second. It is a so-called ordinary electric accessory that switches between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the starting port 33. The blade member 34 is driven by the blade member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 7). In addition, the blade member 34 realizes an opening / closing member (moving member).

The ordinary electric accessory is not limited to the one that operates the blade member 34 so as to open and close in the front-rear direction. For example, a so-called electric tulip type that expands the starting port by rotating the game board 1 in the left-right direction. Or a tongue-shaped member that opens and closes the starting port by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

The passage gate 35 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33. The winning of the game ball to the passing gate 35 is detected by the passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 7). Even if a game ball wins a prize at the passing gate 35, no prize ball is generated.

The first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37A are opened in the hit gaming state (big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state), which is a gaming state advantageous to the player.
The first large winning opening 36 is formed in a part of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 as an opening having a relatively small vertical and horizontal dimensions so that the game balls can be won one by one. A first large winning opening shutter 361A for opening and closing the first large winning opening 36A is provided in the vicinity of the first large winning opening 36A. The winning of the game ball into the first grand prize opening 36A is detected by the first grand winning opening first count switch 360A (see FIG. 7). A first large winning opening shutter 361B for opening and closing the first large winning opening 36B is provided in the vicinity of the first large winning opening 36B. The winning of the game ball into the first grand prize opening 36B is detected by the first grand winning opening second count switch 360B (see FIG. 7).

The second large winning opening 37A is formed in the game board 1 as an opening having a relatively large horizontally long dimension so that a plurality of game balls can win at the same time. A second large winning opening shutter 371A for opening and closing the second large winning opening 37A is provided in the vicinity of the second large winning opening 37A. The winning of the game ball into the second winning opening 37A is detected by the second winning opening count switch 370 (see FIG. 7).

The first large winning opening 36A, the first large winning opening 36B, and the second large winning opening 37A are provided substantially on the right side of the first starting opening 32. The second large winning opening 37A is provided between the first large winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B. More specifically, the second large winning opening 37A is provided on the left side of the first large winning opening 36A and on the right side of the first large winning opening 36B, and is more than the first large winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B. It is provided at the top. The positions where the first prize opening 36A, the first prize opening 36B, and the second prize opening 37A are arranged are not limited to the above-mentioned positions, but may be changed as appropriate according to the specifications of the game machine. Can be done.
Next, the positional relationship (relationship between the positions where the ball can be won) through which the game ball can pass at each large winning opening will be described. The position (height) through which the first prize opening 36A can pass is the position where the "ball" is shown as shown in FIG. 5A, in other words, the first prize opening shutter 361A is closed. The height of the upper surface in the state of being in the state, and the position (height) at which the second prize opening 37A can pass is the position where the "sphere" is shown as shown in FIG. The height of the upper surface when the second prize opening shutter 371A is closed. Further, the position (height) through which the first special winning opening 36B can pass is similarly the height of the upper surface in the state where the first special winning opening shutter 361B is closed. That is, in the present embodiment, the position where the first prize opening 36A can be passed and the position where the second prize opening 37A can be passed are provided as the same or substantially the same height, and the position lower than this height is the first. A position is provided so that one large winning opening 36B can be passed. Further, the route (region) from the position where the game ball can pass through each grand prize opening to each grand prize opening is referred to as the Nth passage region (N = 1, 2, ...). It should be noted that the ball winning position of each large winning opening is not limited to the above-mentioned positional relationship. For example, the ball winning position of the first large winning opening 36A, the ball winning position of the second large winning opening 37A, and the ball winning position of the first large winning opening 36B may be provided lower in this order.

The first large winning opening shutter 361A moves horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, in other words, the first position that facilitates the passage of the game ball through the first large winning opening 36A, and the difficulty. The first large winning opening 36A is switched to an open state or a closed state by being displaced to the second position, and is arranged so as to cover the first large winning opening 36A in the closed state. That is, the first special winning opening shutter 361A changes into an open state in which a game ball can be won in the first large winning opening 36A and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. It is driven by the first shutter solenoid 3610A (see FIG. 7) of the winning opening.
The first large winning opening shutter 361B moves horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, in other words, the first position that facilitates the passage of the game ball through the first large winning opening 36B, and the difficulty. The first large winning opening 36B is switched to an open state or a closed state by being displaced to the second position, and is arranged so as to cover the first large winning opening 36B in the closed state. That is, the first special winning opening shutter 361B changes into an open state in which a game ball can be won in the first large winning opening 36B and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. It is driven by the second shutter solenoid 3610B (see FIG. 7) of the winning opening.
Further, the opening and closing control is performed simultaneously in the first large winning opening shutter 361A and the first large winning opening shutter 361B, and the first large winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B are simultaneously opened and closed.

The second large winning opening shutter 371A opens and closes so as to form a forward leaning posture and a backward posture in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, in other words, passing the game ball through the second large winning opening 37A. By displacing the first position to make it easier and the second position to make it difficult, the second big winning opening 37A is switched to the open state or the closed state, and covers the second big winning opening 37A in the closed state. It is arranged like this. That is, the second special winning opening shutter 371A changes into an open state in which a game ball can be won in the second large winning opening 37A and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. It is driven by the large winning opening shutter solenoid 3710 (see FIG. 7).

The specific area 38A is an area through which the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 36A can pass thereafter, and the non-specific area 38B is a game that has won the first large winning opening 36A but has not passed through the specific area 38A. The area through which the ball and the game ball that has won the first prize opening 36B can pass thereafter, and is covered with the cover member 43. When the game ball that has won the first large winning opening 36A passes through the specific area 38A, it passes through the discharge port 38X and is guided to the back of the game board 1 and collected. The game ball that won the first prize opening 36A but did not pass through the specific area 38A and the game ball that won the first prize opening 36B pass through the discharge port 38Y and are guided to the back of the game board 1. It will be collected.

The first big winning opening 1st count switch 360A is arranged corresponding to the 1st big winning opening 36A, and the winning of the game ball to the 1st big winning opening 36A is the 1st big winning opening 1st count switch. Detected by 360A. The first big winning opening 2nd count switch 360B is arranged corresponding to the first big winning opening 36B, and the winning of the game ball to the first big winning opening 36B is the first big winning opening second count switch. Detected by 360B.
A specific area switch 380A is arranged corresponding to the specific area 38A, and the V prize of the game ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. The non-specific area switch 380B is arranged corresponding to the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of the game ball through the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. Further, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific region 38A is provided in the vicinity of the specific region 38A.

The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A between the open state and the closed state by horizontally moving in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned so as to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacement member 39 is a displacement member so as to change from an open state (easy state) in which the V-winning of the game ball to the specific region 38A is easy and a closed state (difficult state) in which the V-winning is impossible or difficult. It is driven by a solenoid 390 (see FIG. 7). When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, the game ball for which V winning is impossible will pass through the non-specific area 38B.

In addition, the 1st prize opening 36A, the 1st prize opening 36B, the 1st prize opening shutter 361A, the 1st prize opening shutter 361B, the 1st prize opening 1st shutter solenoid 3610A, the 1st prize The mouth second shutter solenoid 3610B, the first big winning opening first count switch 360A, the first big winning opening second count switch 360B, the specific area 38A, and the specific area switch 380A realize the second variable winning device. The second variable winning device can be displaced into a first state in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted, and has a specific area through which the game medium can pass.
The second large winning opening 37A, the second large winning opening shutter 371A, the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 3710, and the second large winning opening count switch 370 realize the first variable winning device. The first variable winning device can be displaced into a first state in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted.
The displacement member 39 and the displacement member solenoid 390 realize a variable member.

One or more general winning openings 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 40, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 7), although the lottery is not performed. The winning of the game ball to the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the non-probability / non-time saving gaming state and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery are non-probability / non-probability / non-probability / short-time gaming states as normal game states controlled by the main control circuit 60 described later. There are a probabilistic game state (special game state) in which the probability is higher than the non-time-saving game state and a time-saving game state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non-probability / non-time-saving game state. If the lottery is won, the game shifts to the jackpot game state (an example of the specific game state).

In the time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is high, so that the support of the blade member 34 as a normal electric pitcher facilitates the winning of the second starting port 33. This state is a so-called "electric support" state, in which the reserved balls of the special symbol game described later can be easily accumulated, and the loss of the game balls can be suppressed by winning the second starting port 33. More specifically, the time-saving game state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (first time-saving game state), and a state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (second time-saving). It means at least one of a state (game state) and a state in which the opening time of the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory is relatively long (third time-saving game state). For example, the time-saving game state includes a state in which the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state proceed simultaneously in any combination. In such a time-saving game state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit game state is improved.

After the end of the jackpot gaming state in which the V prize in the specific area 38A is successfully completed in the jackpot gaming state, the game always shifts to the probabilistic / time-saving gaming state (the probabilistic-changing gaming state and the normal gaming state which is the time-saving gaming state), and is not. It is designed not to shift to the probabilistic / non-time saving game state (the non-probability change game state and the non-time saving game state, which is the normal game state). On the other hand, if the jackpot gaming state ends with the non-V winning without succeeding in V winning in the specific area 38A, the normal gaming state which is the non-probability changing gaming state and the time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. It is supposed to move to.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit game state, for example, 70 times of special symbol lottery (70 times of change display or stop display of special symbol) is performed in the probability change / time saving game state, and the game is not displayed. It is designed to shift to a probabilistic / non-time saving game state. Furthermore, after the end of the big hit game state, for example, 30 times or 70 times of special symbol lottery (30 times or 70 times of special symbol change display or stop display) was performed in the non-probability change / time saving game state. , It is designed to shift to a non-probability / non-time saving game state. After the end of the big hit game state, the probability change / time saving game state may be maintained until the next big hit game state is entered.
In the following, a probabilistic gaming state that ends by performing a predetermined number of special symbol lottery as in the present embodiment is also described as an ST (Specia1 Time) gaming state.

The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a state of being retracted behind the game board 1 when not operating, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing a specific effect. It is located in. The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the central portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs a rotational operation and light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower part of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and emits light.

The cover member 43 is provided to form the first special winning opening 36A, the first special winning opening 36B, and the rolling region 372, and is attached below the passage gate 35. The cover member 43 forms the first special winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B by opening a part of the upper end surface thereof. Further, on the upper end surface of the cover member 43, a rolling region 372 is provided between the first special winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B. With the cover member 43 attached to the game board 1, the displacement member 39 is located in the opening corresponding to the first prize opening 36A. Such a cover member 43 is arranged so as to cover the first special winning opening first count switch 360A, the first special winning opening second count switch 360B, the specific area switch 380A, the non-specific area switch 380B, and the like.
The rolling region 372 is not limited to the configuration provided on the cover member 43. For example, the configuration may be provided on the game board 1.

[Prize winning device mechanism]
Here, the winning device mechanism of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 5A is a front view of the winning device mechanism in a state where the second large winning opening shutter 371A is closed (when closed), and FIG. 5B is a left side view of the upper part of the winning device mechanism in (a). Yes, (c) is a front view of the winning device mechanism in a state where the second large winning opening shutter 371A is open (when opened), and (d) is a left side view of the upper part of the winning device mechanism in (c). is there.

As shown in FIG. 5A, in the present embodiment, the winning device mechanism includes a first winning opening first count switch 360A, a first winning opening second count switch 360B, and a first winning opening shutter 361A. It is realized by including the first prize opening shutter 361B, the second prize opening shutter 371A, the rolling region 372, the specific region 38A, the non-specific region 38B, the discharge ports 38X, 38Y, and the displacement member 39.

In the present winning device mechanism, the first large winning opening shutter 361A for opening and closing the first large winning opening 36A is provided at the upper right corner. Further, below the first large winning opening shutter 361A (directly below in this example), the first large winning opening first count switch 360A, the displacement member 39, the specific area 38A, and the discharge port 38X are sequentially provided. ..
A rolling region 372 is provided in the lower left of the first large winning opening shutter 361A, and a first large winning opening shutter 361B is provided in the lower left of the rolling region 372. A second count switch 360B of the first large winning opening is provided below the shutter 361B of the first large winning opening (directly below in this example).
In the prize-winning device mechanism, a non-specific area 38B and a discharge port 38Y are sequentially provided at the lowermost part.

When the first large winning opening shutter 361A, the first large winning opening shutter 361B, and the second large winning opening shutter 371A are closed, the first large winning opening shutter 361A is in the upper stage, the rolling region 372 is in the middle stage, and the first. Each component has a stepped shape, such that the large winning opening shutter 361B is at the bottom. Therefore, when each shutter is closed, the game ball can roll in the order of the first winning opening shutter 361A, the rolling region 372, and the first winning opening shutter 361B. In this pachinko gaming machine, the game ball is configured to reach the substantially central portion of the rolling region 372 within 2 to 2.1 seconds from the start of the “right-handed” (start of the firing operation).

Next, when the game ball reaches each of the first prize opening shutter 361A, the second prize opening shutter 371A, and the first prize opening shutter 361B, the flow of the game ball when each shutter is open. Will be described.

(When the first big winning opening shutter 361A is open when the game ball reaches the first big winning opening shutter 361A)
The game ball passes through the first large winning opening first count switch 360A and reaches the displacement member 39. At this time, when the displacement member 39 is open, the game ball passes through the specific area 38A and the discharge port 38X. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is closed, the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B provided below and the discharge port 38Y without passing through the specific area 38A.

(When the game ball reaches the 2nd prize opening shutter 371A, the 2nd prize opening shutter 371A is open)
As shown in FIGS. 5 (c) and 5 (d), the game ball passes through the second large winning opening 37A, is guided to the back side of the main winning device mechanism, and passes through the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. There is no.

(When the first big winning opening shutter 361B is open when the game ball reaches the first big winning opening shutter 361B)
After passing through the first large winning opening second count switch 360B, the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B and the discharge port 38Y provided further below. The game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening second count switch 360B does not pass through the specific area 38A.

Next, the LED unit 5 will be described with reference to FIG. The LED unit 5 notifies the player and the like of each game state and lottery result, and as shown in FIG. 6, the normal symbol display unit 51, the ordinary symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, It has a second special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol hold display unit 55, a second special symbol hold display unit 56, and a round display unit 59.

The ordinary symbol display unit 51 drives the blade member 34 as an ordinary electric accessory when the game ball wins a prize in the passing gate 35, and determines whether or not to open the second starting port 33. The lottery result for "game" is displayed. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 can be lit in red and blue, for example, and is lit in red when the LED lamp is won in the normal symbol game, while it is lit in blue when the LED lamp is lost in the normal symbol game. When the LED lamp 511 of the normal symbol display unit 51 is lit, for example, in red, the blade member 34 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to allow the game ball to win the second starting port 33. It should be noted that the lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game may be another lighting mode. For example, in the case of winning, the lighting state or the blinking state is set, while in the case of losing, the lighting mode is turned off. You may do it.

In the normal symbol hold display unit 52, a new game ball wins a prize in the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524. If this is the case, the number of times that the variation display of the normal symbol that is reserved for the next and subsequent variation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 can be performed is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are located on the left side of the normal symbol display unit 51, and are arranged side by side in a row together with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524, for example, when the number of holds is "1", the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523, 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is "2", the LED lamps 521 and 522 are turned on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of holds is "3", the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 are turned on and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of holdings is "4", all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524 are lit.

The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 show the result of a winning lottery for the "special symbol game", and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “first special symbol”) that serves as identification information when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 32, and the first The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting port 32 is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol related to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of a symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “second special symbol”) that serves as identification information when the game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 33, and also displays the second. The result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the starting port 33 is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol related to the second special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 realize the identification information display means (display means).

The variation display of the symbol by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed by, for example, using a 7-segment LED or the like and repeatedly turning on / off each segment individually. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (symbol) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54. At this time, the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the first special symbol and the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the second special symbol have different modes. The winning symbol of the first special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and is referred to as "probability variation 1" or "probability variation 2" indicating that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state can be achieved after the end of the jackpot gaming state. There are nominal jackpot symbols and nominal jackpot symbols such as "time reduction 1" and "time reduction 2" indicating that the game state can be changed to a non-probable and time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game state (see FIG. 8). The hit symbol of the second special symbol is a symbol that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state, and is referred to as "probability variation 3" to "probability variation 5" indicating that the transition to the probability variation game state can be achieved after the end of the jackpot gaming state. There are nominal big hit symbols and nominal small hit symbols such as "small hit 1" and "small hit 2" that trigger the transition to the so-called small hit gaming state (see FIG. 8). The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 are not limited to the 7-segment LED and the like, and may be, for example, a combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551,552,553,554, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is turned on or off by turning on or off these LED lamps 551,552,553,554. Or, for the variation display of the first special symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games when a new game ball is won in the first start port 32 while the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying the variation of the symbol for the special symbol game. Displays the number of times (the number of holds) that the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held in can be executed (the number of holds).
The second special symbol holding display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is turned on or off by turning on or off these LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564. Alternatively, when the second special symbol display unit 54 wins a new game ball in the second starting port 33 during the variable display of the symbol for the special symbol game, it is reserved for the variable display of the symbol for the next and subsequent special symbol games. The number of times the variable display of the second special symbol display unit 54 can be executed (number of holds) is displayed.
Each of the first special symbol reservation display unit 55 and the second special symbol reservation display unit 56 is arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and is located above the normal symbol reservation display unit 52. The display mode of the number of holds on the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the number of holds on the normal symbol hold display unit 52.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 and the second special symbol holding display unit 56 move to the first starting port 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. The game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 (see FIG. 7) provided in the ball passage leading to the ball passage or the second start port switch 330 (see FIG. 7) provided in the ball passage leading to the second start port 33. If so, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbol displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display 54 is stopped and displayed, the reserved first special symbol display 53 or the second special symbol display 54 is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is started.

Here, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. In the present embodiment, the first start port 32 and the first start port 32 and the first are set. 2. The maximum number of pending variable displays of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of the game ball to the starting port 33 is four. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol display unit 53 is stored in the main RAM 63 (FIG. The information of the first special symbol game for four times stored and held as the start storage (start storage information) in the first special symbol start storage area (0) of 7) is the first special symbol start storage area (see 7). 1) -It is stored as a start memory in the first special symbol start storage area (4). Similarly, when the second special symbol game is held for four times, the information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 (the second special symbol start storage area ( The information of the second special symbol game for four times stored and held as the start memory in 0) is stored as the start memory in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4). Be remembered. Therefore, the maximum number of winning prizes held in both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, is eight in total.

In addition, in place of the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, the liquid crystal display device 4 , The hold of the winning of the first starting port 32 and the holding of the winning of the second starting port 33 may be displayed.

The round display unit 59 lights up while the hit symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of times related to the round game described later when the big hit game state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591,592,593, and indicates the number of rounds when the jackpot game state is executed by turning on or off these LED lamps 591,592,593. In the present embodiment, for example, when the number of rounds is 16 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "16R"), the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592 and 593 are turned off. When the number of rounds is 14 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "14R"), the LED lamp 592 is turned on and the LED lamps 591 and 593 are turned off. When the number of rounds is 8 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "8R"), the LED lamp 593 is turned on and the LED lamps 591 and 592 are turned off. When the number of rounds is 2 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "2R"), the LED lamps 591 and 592 are turned on and the LED lamp 593 is turned off. The number of rounds (number of times) may mean the entire number of times the round game (round game) is executed, or may mean the number of orders indicating the order in which the round games are sequentially executed. Regarding the number of rounds, when the former is meant, for example, "16 rounds" or "16R", "12 rounds" or "12R", etc., and when the latter is meant, for example, "16th round", "12Rth", etc. Etc. Further, in the following description, the "round game" may be simply referred to as a "round".

As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 4 is arranged behind the game board 1, and a display area 4A is arranged substantially in the center thereof so that the player can see it. In addition to the result of the winning lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 32 and the second starting port 33, various images related to the game, such as an identification symbol for production, a production image in the normal game state, and a production during the big hit game state It displays an image, a production image for demo display, and the like. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 is adapted to display the identification information in a variable manner on condition that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes a display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, and the lamp / LED 27 can execute a predetermined notification (effect execution means). ).

[Electrical configuration of game machines]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7. In FIG. 7, the “switch” is abbreviated as “SW” and the “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine has a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for performing various controls related to the game, and a sub-control as a sub-control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. It has a circuit 70.

The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 as a read-only memory, a main RAM 63 as a read / write memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as a command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. It has. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, etc.) including the LED unit 5.

The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 62. In addition, the main CPU 61 includes a specific game state transition determination means, a game state control means, a special game state control means, a round game execution means (first round game execution means and a second round game execution means), and an advantageous game. Various means such as execution means (first advantageous game execution means and second advantageous game execution means) are realized.

A first start port switch 320 arranged behind the first start port 32 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

A second start port switch 330 arranged behind the second start port 33 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

These first start port switch 320 and second start port switch 330 are regarded as winning when it detects that a game ball has entered the first start port 32 and the second start port 33, and give a predetermined detection signal. It is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

A passing gate switch 350 arranged behind the passing gate 35 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When a game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 350, it is assumed that the game ball has won a prize in the passing gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of this ordinary symbol lottery is displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 51, an effect image for the player to grasp that the result of the ordinary symbol lottery is won is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. You may do so.

The passing gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that it has won a prize when it detects that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 35. As a result, the passing gate switch 350 provides an opportunity to open the second starting port 33.

The general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B arranged behind the general winning opening 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1 are connected to the main control circuit 60. When a game ball is detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, a preset number of winning balls are performed by the payout device 83.

The first grand prize opening first count switch 360A arranged corresponding to the first grand winning opening 36A is connected to the main control circuit 60. The first grand prize opening first count switch 360A is for counting the number of winning balls to the first grand winning opening 36A. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the first large winning opening 1st count switch 360A, the payout device 83 moves up through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 with a preset number of game balls as prize balls. Pay out to the plate 17 or the lower plate 18.
Further, the first large winning opening second count switch 360B arranged corresponding to the first large winning opening 36B is connected to the main control circuit 60. The first large winning opening second count switch 360B is for counting the number of winning balls to the first large winning opening 36B. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the first large winning opening second count switch 360B, the payout device 83 moves up through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 with a preset number of game balls as prize balls. Pay out to the plate 17 or the lower plate 18. In the present embodiment, the first large winning opening first count switch 360A and the first large winning opening second count switch 360B are appropriately referred to as the first large winning opening count switch 360.

The second special winning opening count switch 370 arranged behind the second special winning opening 37A is connected to the main control circuit 60. The second large winning opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the second large winning opening 37A. When the winning of the game ball is detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370, the payout device 83 uses a preset number of game balls as prize balls and passes through the payout port 20 or the supply port 21 to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate. Pay out to the plate 18.

These 1st prize opening 1st count switch 360A, 1st prize opening 2nd count switch 360B, and 2nd prize opening count switch 370 are 1st prize opening 36A, 1st prize opening 36B, and When the game ball passes through the second special winning opening 37A, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 60.

A specific area switch 380A and a non-specific area switch 380B arranged in the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B are connected to the main control circuit 60. The specific area switch 380A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60, assuming that a V prize is won when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A in the big hit game state. The non-specific area switch 380B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 as a non-V prize when it detects that the game ball has passed through the non-specific area 38B in the big hit game state.

The main control circuit 60 opens and closes the first large winning opening 36A, the first large winning opening 1st shutter solenoid 3610A for driving the first large winning opening shutter 361A, and the first large winning opening 36B. Exclusively the first big winning opening second shutter solenoid 3610B for driving the mouth shutter 361B and the second big winning opening shutter solenoid 3710 for driving the second big winning opening shutter 371A for opening and closing the second big winning opening 37A. To control.
As a result, for example, the first large winning opening shutter 361A and the first large winning opening shutter 361B are in an open state in which the game ball can be won in the first large winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B, and the game ball. In a situation where the first prize opening 36A and the first prize opening 36B are at least closed, the second prize opening shutter 371A is driven to change to a closed state in which the winning is impossible or difficult. , It is driven so as to change between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the second large winning opening 37A and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. The second large winning opening shutter 371A is driven so as to change between an open state in which a game ball can be won in the second large winning opening 37A and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win. In a situation where the two major winning openings 37A are at least closed, the first major winning opening shutter 361A and the first major winning opening shutter 361B are used to move the game balls to the first major winning opening 36A and the first major winning opening 36B. It is driven to change between an open state in which a prize can be won and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or is difficult to win.
Of the first big winning opening 36A, the first big winning opening 36B, and the second big winning opening 37A by such a first big winning opening shutter 361A, a first big winning opening shutter 361B, and a second big winning opening shutter 371A. The open drive is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 and is shifted to the jackpot game state.

The main control circuit 60 controls the blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. As a result, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined light emitting mode on the normal symbol display unit 51, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball enters the second starting port 33. It will be easier.

For example, in the normal symbol game of the present embodiment, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the game state (“non-probability variation / non-time saving game state” in the present embodiment) that is not the time-saving game state is 10/257, and the blade member 34. The probability that is released is lower than in the high probability state (short-time game state). On the other hand, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the high probability state is, for example, 257/257, and when this is won, the blade member 34 is opened three times for 1.3 seconds. Further, in the normal symbol game, the number of normal symbols that are the winning symbols is one, and the number of winning counts that is the upper limit when the second starting port 33 is opened is 10 counts (10).

The main control circuit 60 controls the displacement member solenoid 390 that operates to open and close the displacement member 39 in the specific region 38A. As a result, when the round game described later is being executed in the jackpot game state, the displacement member 39 is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times, and the game ball easily passes through the specific area 38A. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is closed even in the big hit game state, the game ball cannot or is difficult to pass through the specific area 38A, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area 38B.

The first special symbol holding display unit 55 is the first when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. 1 The first based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of pending executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol, that is, the number of pending special symbols are displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been held as the number of pending numbers related to the first special symbol is started.

The second special symbol holding display unit 56 is the second when a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 330 while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variable-displaying. 1 The second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The number of pending executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol, that is, the number of pending special symbols are displayed. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variablely displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been held as the number of pending numbers related to the second special symbol is started.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set so that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variably displayed in the order of winning in the order of winning the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33.

Further, as described above, an upper limit is set for the number of pending executions of the variable display of the special symbol, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 is set in the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33. When the game ball wins a prize and the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, the maximum number of hold numbers for the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is four, respectively. (That is, the number of detections is 4), and the 5th and subsequent ones are not stored as the number of holdings. At this time, when the number of holds decreases due to the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the number of holds is added again up to a maximum of 4.

When the number of the first special symbol games held in the first special symbol display unit 53 is, for example, up to four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol display unit 53 is the information of the main RAM 63. 1 Special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as a start memory, and thereafter, the information of the special symbol game for which the number of reservations is 4 is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63. It is sequentially stored as a start memory.

Similarly, for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of reserved second special symbol games is, for example, up to four, the second special symbol display unit 54 corresponding to the changing second special symbol display unit 54. The information of the 2 special symbol game is stored as the start storage in the 2nd special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and thereafter, the information of the 2nd special symbol game for which the number of reservations is 4 is the second special symbol game of the main RAM 63. 2 The special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as start memory.

Therefore, the total number of game balls held for the special symbol game associated with winning the first starting port 32 and the second starting port 33 is a maximum of eight, and the first special symbol holding display unit 54 and the second special symbol are held. The number of hold displays by LEDs 551 to 554 and LEDs 561 to 564 of the hold display unit 55 is also four, respectively.

The first large winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B are opened by the first large winning opening shutter 361A and the first large winning opening shutter 361B when the first large winning opening count switch 360 (first large winning opening first) is open. The count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the count switch 360A and the first large winning opening second count switch 360B) becomes a predetermined number (for example, the number of winnings is 10), or a predetermined opening time described later is set. It is maintained until one of the conditions such as elapse is satisfied. When the number of winnings of the game ball reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first large winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B has elapsed, the first large winning opening shutter 361A becomes the first large winning opening 36A. Is closed, and the first special winning opening shutter 361B is driven to close the first large winning opening 36B.

In the open state of the 2nd big winning opening 37A by the 2nd big winning opening shutter 371A, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the 2nd big winning opening count switch 370 becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10 winnings). It is maintained until either one of the conditions is satisfied, such as the elapse of a predetermined opening time described later. When the number of winnings of the game ball reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second winning opening 37A has elapsed, the second major winning opening shutter 371A is driven to close the second major winning opening 37A. To.

In the big hit game state, the first big winning opening 36 (the first big winning opening 36A and the first big winning opening 36B) and the second big winning opening are based on the preset big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. The open state and the closed state of 37A are repeated. In the big hit game state, each of the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37A is opened and closed for a predetermined number of times including a plurality of times based on the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. Is called a "round game". A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. After the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37A is closed by one round game, the first big winning opening 36 or the second big winning opening 37A will be opened as the next round game. The state up to is also referred to as "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval" or simply "interval". In one round game, each of the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37A may be opened and closed a plurality of times. Further, in one round game, the open / closed state of the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37A is exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one big winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big winning opening is continuously closed.

The pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a so-called small hit gaming state as a gaming state having a property different from that of the big hit gaming state. Unlike the big hit game state, the small hit game state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and in the small hit game state of the present embodiment, the first big winning opening 36 is opened two or three times. It is stipulated. Of course, in the small hit game state, the arbitrary or specific large winning opening may be controlled so as to be opened only once, or may be controlled to be repeatedly opened over a plurality of times.
This small hit game state is a game state in which a small hit is won by a special symbol lottery. The gaming state basically does not change before and after the transition to the small hit gaming state. For example, when a small hit is won in a non-probable variable game state and the game shifts to the small hit game state, the game state after the end of the small hit game state remains the non-probable variable game state before the transition to the small hit game state. Therefore, it does not shift to the probabilistic gaming state. Similarly, when a small hit is won in the probabilistic game state and the game shifts to the small hit game state, the game state after the end of the small hit game state is the small hit game state as long as the number of games in the probabilistic game state remains. It remains in the probabilistic gaming state before shifting to, and does not shift to the non-probabilistic gaming state.

Round games are counted as the number of rounds (number of times) such as 1 round and 2 rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including drawings referred to in the description), the numbered "rounds" such as the first round or the first round are simply "R" such as 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc. ] May be omitted. In addition, in one round game, the maximum number of prizes per round is reached before the first prize opening 36 or the second prize opening 37A is opened a predetermined number of times. When it reaches, the 1st prize opening 36 and the 2nd prize opening 37A will be closed, and the 1st prize opening 36 and the 2nd prize opening 37A will not be opened for the remaining number of times of opening. , The round game is terminated.

Further, in a specific round game in which the first big winning opening 36 is opened in the big hit game state, the displacement member 39 is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) described later. As a result, the specific area 38A is in the open state and the closed state in the specific round game in the jackpot game state. That is, in a specific round game, the game ball may pass through the specific area 38A and win a V prize, while in a round game other than the specific round game, the game ball is tentatively placed in the first large winning opening 36A. Even if a prize is won, the game ball cannot or is difficult to pass through the specific area 38A. That is, the types of the big hit game state (specific game state) include the big hit game state that does not include the specific round game and the big hit game state that includes the specific round game.

In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image related to the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, in the variable display of the special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is composed of numbers except in a specific case. Designs (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as "0", "1", "2" ... "7" are displayed in three columns.

On the other hand, when the special symbol that has been variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Further, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the changed or stopped special symbol has a specific stop display mode, the player is made to understand that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

Specifically, in either the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54, the special symbol is displayed in a specific display mode corresponding to, for example, a "big hit" in which many balls can be obtained. When the display is stopped, the combination of decorative symbols for effect displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is in a specific display mode (for example, a state in which all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows). In addition, the effect image for a big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

For example, the main CPU 61 included in such a main control circuit 60 is in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, provided that the gaming medium has passed through the first starting area (second starting port 33). ) Functions as a specific game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to shift to.

Further, for example, the main CPU 61 is provided on the condition that the determination result of shifting to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determination means, or on the condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific mode. In addition, it functions as a game state control means for controlling the game state to a specific game state.

Further, for example, the main CPU 61 shifts to the specific game state by the specific game state transition determination means after the specific game state ends, provided that the game medium has passed through the specific area 38A in the specific game state. Special game state control that controls a special game state (probability change game state) in which a determination result is relatively easy to obtain, in other words, a special game state (probability change game state) in which identification information is easily stopped and displayed in a specific mode by a display means. Functions as a means. The main CPU 61 can control the special gaming state until the number of variable display times of the identification information by the display means reaches a predetermined number after the end of the specific gaming state.

Further, for example, in the specific game state, the main CPU 61 changes the first variable winning device (second large winning opening shutter 371A) into the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state) in a round game (round). It functions as a first round game execution means (first advantageous game execution means) for executing a game) a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61, which functions as the first round game execution means, can control the first variable winning device to be changed to the first mode and the second mode a plurality of times during the execution of at least one round game. ..

Further, for example, in the specific game state, the main CPU 61 sets the second variable winning device (first special winning opening shutter 361A and first large winning opening shutter 361B) in the first mode (open state) and the second mode (closed state). ) Functions as a second round game execution means (second advantageous game execution means) for executing a round game (round game) a predetermined number of times.
Further, for example, in the main CPU 61 that functions as the second round game execution means, the total time during which the second variable winning device is in the first state as the second round game is the first time (for example, 5.1 seconds). As defined, when the second variable winning device is in the first state, the variable member can be in the easy state for a total of the second time (for example, 0.1 second), which is a difficult-to-pass round game. (For example, the 1st round of "hit pattern 3" described later) and the time when the second variable winning device is in the first state are defined as the first time in total, and the second variable winning device is in the first state. In the case of, the easy-to-pass round game (for example, "hit pattern 2" described later, in which the variable members can be in an easy state for a third time (for example, 5.1 seconds) longer than the second time in total. 1R) and can be executed.
Further, for example, as a second round game, the total time during which the second variable winning device is in the first state is defined as the first time (for example, 7.1 seconds), and the second variable winning device is the second. In the 1st state, the variable member can be in an easy state for a total of 2 hours (for example, 0.1 seconds) in a difficult-to-pass round game (for example, the 1st round of the "hit pattern 4" described later. ) And, as the second round game, the time during which the second variable winning device is in the first state is defined as the third time (for example, 3.1 seconds), which is shorter than the first time in total, and the second. When the variable winning device is in the first state, the variable member can be in an easy state for a fourth time (for example, 3.1 seconds) longer than the second time in total (easy-to-pass round game). For example, 1R) of the "hit pattern 1" described later) can be executed.

Here, the jackpot game state is, for example, a specific game state A in which the first round game executing means executes the first round game a predetermined number of times, and the second round game executing means executes only the difficult-to-pass round game a predetermined number of times. And the specific game state B in which the first round game executing means executes the first round game a predetermined number of times, and the second round game executing means executes the second round game a predetermined number of times including the easy-to-pass round game. Whether or not the special game state control means controls the special game state, the probability of being determined to shift by the specific game state transition determination means is the same, and whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific area. Regardless of this, after the end of the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state including the specific gaming state C that does not shift to the more disadvantageous gaming state than before the transition to the specific gaming state is realized.
Further, in the specific gaming state B and the specific gaming state C, the displacement modes of the second variable winning device are the same or substantially the same.

A specific example of control of the main CPU 61 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

The main ROM 62 stores programs and various tables for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes described later, including functions as the means of the main CPU 61 described above.

The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As the temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, another readable / writable storage medium may be used instead of the main RAM 63.

The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61 and output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub-control circuit 70.

The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 63 when the power is cut off.

Various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first large winning opening first shutter solenoid 3610A, a first large winning opening second shutter solenoid 3610B, a second large winning opening shutter solenoid 3710, and a blade member solenoid 340. The displacement member solenoid 390 and the external terminal plate 80 are included.

The external terminal board 80 is located between a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk and displaying the number of big hits, or an external device such as a hall computer 100 that manages a plurality of pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall. It is for data communication with.

Various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start port switch 320, a second start port switch 330, a passing gate switch 350, a first grand prize opening first count switch 360A, and a first major winning opening first. 2 count switch 360B, 2nd big winning opening count switch 370, specific area switch 380A, non-specific area switch 380B, general winning opening left switch 400A, general winning opening right switch 400B, and backup clear switch 81 are included.

The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and the payout / launch control circuit 82, which will be described later, in response to an operation by the hall manager.

Further, the launching device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected to the main control circuit 60 via the payout / launch control circuit 82.

The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / launch control circuit 82. The payout / launch control circuit 82 mainly controls the launch device 26 and the payout device 83, and the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected to each other. In addition, the payout / launch control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize the game value adding means.

The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting the lending of a game ball according to the operation of the player, and can transmit and receive a signal to and from the ball lending operation panel 85. ..

The payout / launch control circuit 82 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. This causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. For example, the payout device 83 pays out three game balls as the number of prize balls per winning to the first starting port 32 or the second starting port 33, and as the number of prize balls per winning to the general winning opening 40. Ten game balls are paid out, and 15 game balls are paid out as the number of prize balls for each prize in the first prize opening 36 or the second prize opening 37A.

The payout / launch control circuit 82 supplies electric power to the launch solenoid (not shown) when the launch handle 26b of the launch device 26 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction. Control is performed to launch the game ball toward the game area 1p.

The main CPU 61 interrupts the main process and executes the timer interrupt process as the interrupt process even during the execution of the main process described later. The timer interrupt process is executed triggered by an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60, and is configured so that commands are supplied from the main control circuit 60.

The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and is a sub CPU 71, a program ROM 72, a work RAM 73, a command input port 74, a backup capacitor 75, and display control. It has a circuit 76, a voice control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect device control circuit 79. A liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. Speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c are connected to the voice control circuit 77. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to a movable effect device 42 including a motor and a mechanism for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

Further, in the sub-control circuit 70, a push-button switch 90A provided on the push-button 9A is connected, and a jog dial switch 90B provided on the jog dial 9B is connected to the sub-control circuit 70. The push-button switch 90A detects the operation of the push-button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B identifies the rotation direction and rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. A push-button switch 90A supplies a push-button switch 90A to the sub-control circuit 70, and a rotation operation signal is supplied from the jog dial switch 90B.

The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display means. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60. In addition, the sub CPU 71 realizes the notification means, the effect mode determining means, and the effect mode control means. The program ROM 72 and the work RAM 73 realize the storage means. The sub CPU 71 and the program ROM 72 function as display control means for controlling the display means (liquid crystal display device 4).

For example, when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in one specific gaming state (for example, hitting "small hit 2"), the liquid crystal display device 4 has a special gaming state after the end of one specific gaming state. It functions as a notification means capable of notifying whether or not the control is performed. Further, for example, when the game medium does not pass through the specific area in one specific game state (for example, hit of "small hit 1"), the liquid crystal display device 4 is special after the end of one specific game state. Regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the game state, it functions as a notification means capable of performing the same mode of notification as the notification regarding the game state. Further, for example, in the liquid crystal display device 4, the game medium passes through a specific area in one specific game state (for example, a big hit of "probability variation 5") and another specific game state (for example, a hit of "small hit 1"). If so, it functions as a notification means capable of notifying that the game medium has passed through the specific area.

The sub CPU 71 is, for example, an effect mode determining means capable of determining any effect mode from a plurality of effect modes (normal mode, first time reduction mode, second time reduction mode, probability variation mode) including the first effect mode. Functions as. Further, for example, the sub CPU 71 functions as an effect mode control means capable of controlling the effect mode determined by the effect mode determining means.
For example, the effect mode determining means allows the game medium to pass through a specific area during a second advantageous game (for example, V winning middle opening) executed in one specific game state (for example, hitting "probability change 5"). The first effect mode (for example, the probability variation mode) can be determined on the condition that the mode has been changed.
Further, for example, the effect mode determining means is provided on the condition that the game medium does not pass through the specific area during the second advantageous game executed in one specific game state (for example, hit of "small hit 1"). It is possible to determine an effect mode (for example, the first time saving mode) different from the one effect mode (for example, the probability variation mode).
Further, for example, when the effect mode determining means is controlled to the first effect mode (for example, the probability variation mode), the first effect mode is provided on the condition that the special gaming state (for example, the probability variation game state) ends. It is possible to determine a different production mode.
Further, for example, the effect mode determining means is a case where the game medium does not pass through the specific area in one specific game state (for example, a hit of "small hit 2"), and the special game is performed after the end of the one specific game state. When the state control means controls the special gaming state, the first effect mode (for example, the probability variation mode) can be determined.
Further, for example, when the effect mode control means is controlling to the first effect mode, one specific game state (for example, hit of "probability change 5") or another specific game state (for example, "small hit 1"). The first effect mode can be controlled on condition that the game medium has passed through the specific area during the second advantageous game executed in the specific game state in which the transition is controlled and the transition is controlled. ..

A specific example of control of the sub CPU 71 that realizes each of the above means will be described later.

The program ROM 72 stores a program and various tables for the sub CPU 71 to mainly control various effects.

The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, variable values, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 71.

The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 and transmits them to the sub CPU 71.

The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by promptly supplying power to the work RAM 73 at the time of power failure.

The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 71, for example, for generating various image data with an image data processor (VDP). It is composed of an image data ROM that stores data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D / A converter that converts image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and is not limited thereto.

The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative pattern image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraudulent notification image data, and the like.

Further, the display control circuit 76 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. An image is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

The voice control circuit 77 is for controlling the voice generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c, for example, a sound source IC for controlling the voice, a voice data ROM for storing various voice data, and a voice signal. Includes an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying. The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

The sound source IC controls the voice generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c, and one from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Voice data can be selected.

Further, the sound source IC reads the selected voice data from the voice data ROM, converts the voice data into a predetermined voice signal, and supplies the voice signal to the amplifier. This amplifier amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c.

The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling a lamp / LED 27 including a decorative lamp, a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like. It is composed of. The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is also an example, and is not limited to this.

The movable effect device control circuit 79 operates (swings) the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by operating the pressing operation button 9A or the like during the valid period of the operation on the operation unit 9, for example, in the big hit game state. Etc.) to control the production operation.

[Game machine specifications]
Next, with reference to FIG. 8, specifications relating to the gaming characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, the hit probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol including the small hit probability described later is 1/80 (25/2000) in the low probability time (non-probability variation game state). ), It is 1/25 (80/2000) at the time of high probability (probability change game state). The small hit probability of being in the small hit game state is 0 in the first special symbol and 1/25 (80/2000) in the second special symbol. In addition, the probability at the time of low probability and the probability at the time of high probability in the jackpot probability is not limited to the above. It is possible to appropriately adopt the probability that it is easier to win when the probability is high than when the probability is low. Moreover, the small hit probability is not limited to the above-mentioned one. The first special symbol may also be won. In this case, the winning probability of the other special symbol may be higher or lower than that of one special symbol, and may be the same.

As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is prioritized for digestion. The order of digestion may be the order of winning, or the first special symbol may be the priority digestion.
As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation game state), the ST game state in which the probability variation game state continues up to 70 times as the number of games (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) is implemented. The number of STs is not limited to the above. In addition, the probabilistic game state may continue until the next big hit.

The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the big hit symbol "probability change 1" of the first special symbol, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) becomes "hit pattern 1", 16R is given as the number of rounds of the round game, and the bonus content is "1st". It is a special symbol small probability change big hit. The probability (selectivity) of "probability variation 1" as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is set to 20/100.

In the jackpot symbol "probability variation 2" of the first special symbol, it becomes "hit pattern 2", 8R is given as the number of rounds, and the bonus content is "probability variation jackpot in the first special symbol". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 2" of the first special symbol is set to 40/100.

The jackpot symbol "time reduction 1" of the first special symbol is "hit pattern 3", the number of rounds is 8R, and the bonus content is "first special symbol medium time reduction jackpot". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol "time saving 1" of the first special symbol is set to 30/100.
In the big hit symbol "time saving 2" of the first special symbol, it becomes "hit pattern 4", the number of rounds 16R is given, and the bonus content is "the first special symbol big time saving big hit". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol "time saving 2" of the first special symbol is set to 10/100.

In the big hit symbol "probability change 3" of the second special symbol, it becomes "hit pattern 5", the number of rounds 14R is given, and the bonus content is "the second special symbol big hit probability change big hit". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 3" of the second special symbol is set to 3/100.
In the jackpot symbol "probability change 4" of the second special symbol, it becomes "hit pattern 6", the number of rounds 16R is given, and the bonus content is "second special symbol extra large probability variation jackpot". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 4" of the second special symbol is set to 2/100.
In the big hit symbol "probability variation 5" of the second special symbol, it becomes "hit pattern 7", the number of rounds 2R is given, and the bonus content is "second special symbol hit". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 5" of the second special symbol is set to 95/100.

The small hit symbol "small hit 1" of the second special symbol is "hit pattern 8", and the bonus content is "second special symbol hit". The selection rate of the small hit symbol "small hit 1" of the second special symbol is set to 70/100.
The small hit symbol "small hit 2" of the second special symbol is "hit pattern 9", and the bonus content is "second special symbol discrimination hit". The selection rate of the small hit symbol "small hit 2" of the second special symbol is set to 30/100.
In the small hit game state, unlike the big hit game state, there is no concept of a round game, so the number of rounds is not specified.
The number of rounds is not limited to 2R, 8R, 14R, and 16R, and a jackpot of another number of rounds may be provided. Further, the types of jackpots are not limited to those described above. The types of jackpots of the first special symbol may be increased, or the types of jackpots of the second special symbol may be increased. Further, the type of small hit is not limited to two types, and may be one type or three or more types.

The number of large winning openings is set so that the maximum number of winnings per round is 10 for both the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37A. The number of counts (specified number / maximum number of prizes) of the large prize openings is set to "10", but the number is not limited to this.
As for the time saving performance (specification of the time saving game state), when shifting to the probability change game state after the end of the big hit game state, during a high probability (while in the probability change game state), the big hit of "probability change 1" to "probability change 5" If it does not shift to the probabilistic game state after the end of the gaming state, it will be up to 70 times in the non-probabilistic game state, and if it does not shift to the probabilistic game state after the end of the big hit game states of "time reduction 1" and "time reduction 2", it will be in the non-probability change game state. It is set so that the time-saving game state continues up to 30 times. The time saving performance may be more or less (including 0) than the number of probabilistic gaming states.
The number of prize balls is 3 for each winning opening (1st starting opening 32 and 2nd starting opening 33), 10 for each winning entry to the general winning opening 40, and the large winning opening (1st). The number of prizes is set to 15 for each prize in the large prize opening 36A, the first large winning opening 36B, and the second large winning opening 37A). The number of prize balls is not limited to those described above.
The hit probability of a normal symbol is set to be 10/257 when the probability is low and 257/257 when the probability is high. The number of hit symbols of a normal symbol is set to one. The probabilities at low probability and high probability are not limited to those described above. It is possible to appropriately adopt the probability that the high probability is easier to win than the low probability. In addition, it may not be won at the time of low probability. Further, the number of symbols per ordinary symbol is not limited to those described above. There may be two or more. In the case of two or more, it is preferable that different opening patterns are associated with each other.
The number of winning counts when the second starting port 33 is opened is set to count up to 10 as an upper limit. The second starting port count number (specified number / upper limit winning number) may be a value other than this.

[1 round opening / closing pattern]
Next, the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening in one round will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10.

As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of opening / closing patterns A to H are defined as a one-round opening / closing pattern (one-round opening / closing pattern) for the first large winning opening 36. As shown in FIG. 10, a plurality of opening / closing patterns I to K are defined as one-round opening / closing patterns for the second large winning opening 37A. The opening pattern of the big winning opening is not limited to the above 11 types. 10 types or less may be provided, or 13 types or more may be provided.
The opening / closing patterns A to F and I to K are opening / closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening / closing patterns G and H are opening / closing patterns corresponding to the small hit gaming state. The opening / closing patterns G and H in the small hit game state are not defined as one round, but are shown together with other opening / closing patterns A to F and I to K for convenience. The first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37A are simply referred to as the large winning opening unless it is necessary to distinguish them. The opening / closing patterns A to K shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 are merely examples, and the specific time for defining the opening / closing pattern may be other than those shown in the drawings.

(Opening and closing pattern of the 1st prize opening)
The opening / closing pattern A is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 12 s, and then the open state continues for 3 s again. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round section from the first opening state to the final closing state. Similarly, in the other opening / closing patterns B to H, the round section is defined as the period from the first opening state to the final closing state.
In the section where the open state is 0.1 s, the open state of the big winning opening is relatively short, which is a short opening. In the section where the open state is 3 s, the open state of the large winning opening is longer than the short opening, and the open state of the large winning opening is shorter than the long opening, which is relatively long. That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, after the short opening occurs once, the middle opening occurs once after passing through the closed state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 3.1 s.
In the open state where the short is open, it is extremely difficult to win the game ball to the large winning opening, and in the open state where the middle is open, it is easier to win the game ball to the large winning opening than when the short is opened. In the open state, which is a long opening, it is easier to win a game ball in the big winning opening than in the middle opening. For convenience of explanation, a section in which the open state is 0.1 s or less is referred to as short open, a section in which the open state is longer than 0.1 s and less than 28 s is referred to as middle open, and a section in which the open state is 28 s or more is referred to as long open.

The opening / closing pattern B is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 12 s, and then the open state continues for 5 s again. That is, in the opening / closing pattern B, after the short opening occurs once, the middle opening occurs once after passing through the closed state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern B is 5.1 s. Although the total opening time is longer than that of the opening / closing pattern A, it may be the same or shorter.

The opening / closing pattern C is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 3 s, and then the open state continues for 5 s again. That is, in the opening / closing pattern C, after the short opening occurs once, the middle opening occurs once after passing through the closed state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 5.1 s.

The opening / closing pattern D is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 3 s, and then the open state continues for 7 s again. That is, in the opening / closing pattern D, after the short opening occurs once, the middle opening occurs once after passing through the closed state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern D is 7.1 s. Although the total opening time is longer than that of the opening / closing pattern C, it may be the same or shorter.

The opening / closing pattern E is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is only for 0.1 s. That is, the opening / closing pattern E is such that the short opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern E is 0.1 s. The number of times the first large winning opening 36 is opened may be two or more. Further, the opening time may be a time other than the above-mentioned time.

The opening / closing pattern F is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.1 s, the closed state is 11 s, and then the open state continues for 1.6 s again. That is, in the opening / closing pattern F, after the short opening occurs once, the middle opening occurs once after passing through the closed state once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern F is 1.7 s.

The opening / closing pattern G has an open state of 0.1 s for the first time, then a closed state for 2 s, an open state for 0.1 s again, a closed state for 11 s, and then the open state for 1.6 s again. It is an opening and closing pattern. That is, in the opening / closing pattern G, after the short opening occurs once, the closed state occurs once, the short opening occurs once, and then the closed state occurs once, and the middle opening occurs once. , The total opening time of the opening / closing pattern G is 1.8 s. The number of times the first large winning opening 36 is opened may be 2 times or less or 4 times or more. Further, the first prize opening 36 is opened three times, but the opening time is not limited to the above. The opening time of any one or more may be shorter or longer than the opening time described above. Further, the closing time of the first prize opening 36 may be longer or shorter than the above-mentioned time.

The opening / closing pattern H is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 0.9 s, the closed state is 13 s, and then the open state continues for 0.9 s again. That is, in the opening / closing pattern H, after the middle opening occurs once, the middle opening occurs once after the closed state, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern H is 1.8 s.

The opening / closing patterns A to D and F may be opened once or three times or more. Further, in any of the opening / closing patterns, the first winning opening 36 is opened twice, but the opening time is not limited to that described above. The opening time of either one or both may be shorter or longer than the opening time described above. Further, the closing time may be longer or shorter than the above-mentioned time.
Further, in the present embodiment, both opening / closing plates (first prize opening shutter 361A and first prize opening shutter 361B) are always opened or closed, but only one of them is opened. You may.

(Opening and closing pattern of the 2nd prize opening)
The opening / closing pattern I is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state continues for 1 s. That is, the opening / closing pattern I is such that the middle opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern I is 1 s.

The opening / closing pattern J is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state continues for 10 seconds. That is, the opening / closing pattern J is such that the middle opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern J is 10 s. Although the total opening time is longer than that of the opening / closing pattern I, it may be the same or shorter.

The opening / closing pattern K is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state continues for 28 s. That is, the opening / closing pattern K is such that the long opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern K is 28 s. Although the total opening time is longer than the opening / closing patterns I and J, it may be the same or shorter for either one or both.

Regarding the opening / closing patterns I to K, the number of times the second large winning opening 37A is opened may be two or more. Further, the opening time of the second large winning opening 37A may be a time other than the above-mentioned time.
Further, in the present embodiment, although it is composed of one opening / closing plate (second large winning opening shutter 371A), two or more may be provided. In this case, all or only a part may be opened.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific region 38A will be described with reference to FIG.

The displacement member 39 basically operates in conjunction with the open / closed state of the first big winning opening 36 regardless of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state. As shown in FIG. 11, as for the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member operation pattern), as a general rule, the specific area 38A is closed after the operation period for opening the specific area 38A is initially 0.1 s. There is a non-operating period of 2 s, followed by an operating period of 0.1 s in the open state, then a non-operating period of 9 s in which the specific area 38A is closed, and then an operation in which the operating period continues for 8 s again. It is defined as a pattern. The total operating time of the displacement member operating pattern is 8.2 s. During the operation period of 0.1 s, the open state of the specific region 38A becomes relatively short, so that it becomes extremely difficult to win a V prize in the specific region 38A. On the other hand, during the operation period of 8 s at the longest, the open state of the specific region 38A is relatively long, so that it is relatively easy to win a V prize in the specific region 38A. Regarding the operation period of 8s, in one round in which the first large winning opening 36 is opened and closed, for example, when the number of large winning opening counts reaches the upper limit winning number, the first large winning opening 36 is closed. When a predetermined monitoring processing time (for example, 1098 ms) for the residual sphere, which will be described later, has passed, the displacement member 39 is inactive and the specific region 38A is closed even before the predetermined 8 s has elapsed. There is.

Regarding the opening pattern of the displacement member 39, different patterns may be provided, or two or more types may be provided. For example, a pattern in which the second prize opening 37A is always open while it is open, or a pattern in which opening and closing is always repeated at regular intervals (for example, every 2 seconds) may be executed or increased instead.
When only one of the first large winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B is opened, the opening and closing may be performed according to the above-mentioned pattern only when the first large winning opening shutter 361A is opened. ..

[Large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state and the small hit game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 12, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 9 are defined as the large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern).
The "hit pattern 1" is a hit pattern in which the number of rounds specified for the rounds that are generally open and are generated at the time of the bonus "probability variation big hit 1" is 16R.
In addition, the interval between rounds is a section in which the big winning opening is closed after the last big winning opening is closed in one round until the big winning opening is first opened in the next round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as the inter-round interval pattern, an interval pattern a in which the closed state (closing time) is 1.3 s and an interval pattern b in which the closed state is 2 s are defined. ..
In the "hit pattern 1", the interval between all rounds is the interval pattern a, the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in each of the 1st and 2nd rounds, and the third to 16th rounds are the first. It is stipulated that the two major winning openings 37A have an opening / closing pattern I. In addition, both the 1st R and the 2nd R can win a prize in the first large winning opening 36, and are executed as a round in which a V winning can be made in the specific area 38A (FIG. 13 (a)).

The "hit pattern 2" is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the bonus "probability variation big hit 2" and the specified number of rounds is specified as 8R. In the "hit pattern 2", the interval between all rounds is the interval pattern a, the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in each of the 1st and 2nd rounds, and the second big in the 3rd to 8th rounds. The winning opening 37A is defined to have an opening / closing pattern J. In addition, both the 1st R and the 2nd R can win a prize in the first large winning opening 36, and are executed as a round in which a V winning can be made in the specific area 38A (FIG. 14A).

The "hit pattern 3" is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the bonus "time saving big hit 1" and the specified number of rounds is specified as 8R. In the "hit pattern 3", the interval between all rounds is the interval pattern a, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern C in both the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in all the 3rd to 8th rounds. The second big winning opening 37A is defined to have an opening / closing pattern J. It should be noted that both the 1st and 2nd rounds can win the first large winning opening 36, but it is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is impossible or difficult (FIG. 14 (b)). ..

The "hit pattern 4" is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the bonus "time saving big hit 2" and the specified number of rounds is specified as 16R. In the "hit pattern 4", the interval between all rounds is the interval pattern a, the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern D in each of the 1st and 2nd rounds, and the second big in the 3rd to 8th rounds. The winning opening 37A is defined to have the opening / closing pattern J, and the second major winning opening 37A is defined to have the opening / closing pattern K at the 9th to 16th rounds. It should be noted that both the 1st and 2nd rounds can win the first large winning opening 36, but the V winning in the specific area 38A is impossible or difficult round (FIG. 13 (b)). ..

The "hit pattern 5" is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the bonus "probability variation big hit 3" and the specified number of rounds is specified as 14R. In the "hit pattern 5", the interval between all rounds is the interval pattern a, the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in each of the 1st and 2nd rounds, and the second big in the 3rd to 14th rounds. The winning opening 37A is defined to have an opening / closing pattern K. The 1st and 2nd rounds are executed as the same round as the "hit pattern 2".

The "hit pattern 6" is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the bonus "probability variation big hit 4" and the specified number of rounds is defined as 16R. In the "hit pattern 6", the interval between all rounds is the interval pattern a, the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in each of the 1st and 2nd rounds, and the second big in the 3rd to 16th rounds. The winning opening 37A is defined to have an opening / closing pattern K. The 1st and 2nd rounds are executed as the same round as the "hit pattern 2".

The "hit pattern 7" is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the bonus "probability variation big hit 5" and the specified number of rounds is defined as 2R. In the "hit pattern 7", the interval between rounds is one, the interval pattern b, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern E at the 1st round, and the first big winning opening 36 opens / closes at the 2nd round. It is specified to be pattern F. The 1st R is executed as a round in which V winning in the specific area 38A is impossible or difficult according to the opening / closing pattern E, and the 2R is executed as a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is possible according to the opening / closing pattern F. (Fig. 15 (a)).

The "hit pattern 8" is generated at the time of the bonus "small hit 1", and it is stipulated that the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern G only once. That is, in the "hit pattern 8", there is a possibility that the game ball wins the first large winning opening 36, and there is a possibility that the specific area 38A is V-winned (FIG. 15 (b)), but the specific area is tentatively. Even if there is a V prize in 38A, it is executed as if it is not possible to shift to the probabilistic game state.

The "hit pattern 9" is generated at the time of the bonus "small hit 2", and is defined so that the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern H (FIG. 9) only once. That is, in the "hit pattern 9", there is a possibility that the game ball wins the first large winning opening 36, and there is a possibility that the specific area 38A is V-winned, but there is a V-winning to the specific area 38A. Even if it is, it is executed as if it cannot shift to the probabilistic game state.

In each hit pattern, an opening / closing pattern is associated with each round in advance, but an opening / closing pattern other than the above may be associated. For example, the 1st R pattern in the "hit pattern 1" may be the opening / closing pattern B instead of the opening / closing pattern A.
Further, the interval pattern may be one type or three or more types. Further, the time of the interval patterns a and b may be a time other than the above.
Further, regarding the "hit pattern 1" to "hit pattern 6", the round in which the first big winning opening opens may be only the 1st round, and the opening pattern in the second round may be the opening pattern of the second big winning opening. For example, the 2R opening pattern may be used as the 3R opening pattern.
Further, regarding the "hit pattern 7", one round may be set (the specified number of rounds is 1R), and the opening pattern of the first round may be set as the opening / closing pattern G. As a result, the "hit pattern 8" can be made the same as the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening and the opening / closing pattern of the displacement member 39. It becomes impossible to distinguish "small hit 1" at all.

[Operation of the first big winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 of the "hit pattern 1" corresponding to the bonus "probability change big hit 1" and the "hit pattern 4" corresponding to the bonus "time saving big hit 2"]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation timings of the first large winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 in the “hit pattern 1” and the “hit pattern 4” will be described. The first round will be mainly described, and the other rounds will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown as an example in FIG. 13A, in the 1st round of the “hit pattern 1”, the displacement member is based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. 11 with the start of the open state of the first large winning opening 36. When 39 is operated, the specific area 38A is opened and closed so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the first large winning opening 36. More specifically, in the 1st round, after the first big winning opening 36 finishes the middle opening (the section where the open state is 3s) and becomes closed, the first big winning opening 36 to the first big winning opening 36 When a predetermined monitoring processing time for monitoring the remaining spheres remaining in the sphere passage up to the count switch 360 elapses, the displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, thereby forming a specific area. 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A is closed after an open state of about 5 s, which is shorter than 8 s defined as the longest operating period by the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIG.
Also in the 2nd round of the "hit pattern 1", the first big winning opening 36 and the specific area 38A are in the open state and the closed state as in the 1st round.

On the other hand, as shown as an example in FIG. 13B, in the 1st round of the "hit pattern 4", with the start of the open state of the first large winning opening 36, based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. When the displacement member 39 operates, the specific area 38A is opened and closed so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the first large winning opening 36. More specifically, in the 1st round, when the predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first large winning opening 36 finishes the middle opening (the section where the opening state is 7s) and becomes the closed state, the displacement member 39 Is forced to remain inactive so that the specific region 38A remains closed. That is, in the specific region 38A, 1R is completed without being in the open state of 8s defined as the longest operating period by the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIG.
Also in the 2nd round of the "hit pattern 4", the first large winning opening 36 and the specific area 38A are in the open state and the closed state as in the 1st round.

[Operation of the first big winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 of the "hit pattern 2" corresponding to the bonus "probability change big hit 2" and the "hit pattern 3" corresponding to the bonus "time saving big hit 1"]
Next, the operation timings of the first winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 in the "hit pattern 2" and the "hit pattern 3" will be described with reference to FIG. The first round will be mainly described, and the other rounds will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown as an example in FIG. 14A, in the 1st round of the “hit pattern 2”, the displacement member is based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. 11 with the start of the open state of the first large winning opening 36. When 39 is operated, the specific area 38A is opened and closed so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the first large winning opening 36. More specifically, in the 1st round, when the predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first large winning opening 36 finishes the middle opening (the section where the opening state is 5s) and becomes the closed state, the displacement member 39 Is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, so that the specific area 38A is changed from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A is closed after an open state of about 7 s, which is shorter than 8 s defined as the longest operating period by the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIG.
In the 2nd round of the "hit pattern 2", the first large winning opening 36 and the specific area 38A are in the open state and the closed state as in the 1st round.

On the other hand, as shown as an example in FIG. 14B, in the 1st round of the "hit pattern 3", with the start of the open state of the first large winning opening 36, based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. When the displacement member 39 operates, the specific area 38A is opened and closed so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the first large winning opening 36. More specifically, in the 1st round, when the predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first large winning opening 36 finishes the middle opening (the section where the opening state is 5s) and becomes the closed state, the displacement member 39 Is forced to remain inactive so that the specific region 38A remains closed. That is, the first R of the specific region 38A ends without being in the open state of 8 s defined as the longest operating period by the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIG.
In the 2nd round of the "hit pattern 3", the first large winning opening 36 and the specific area 38A are in the open state and the closed state as in the 1st round.

[Operation of the first big winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 of the "hit pattern 7" corresponding to the bonus "probability change big hit 5" and the "hit pattern 8" corresponding to the bonus "small hit 1"]
Next, the operation timings of the first special winning opening 36 and the displacement member 39 in the "hit pattern 7" and the "hit pattern 8" will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown as an example in FIG. 15A, in the 1st round of the “hit pattern 7”, the displacement member is based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. 11 with the start of the open state of the first large winning opening 36. When 39 is operated, the specific area 38A is opened and closed so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the first large winning opening 36. More specifically, in the 1st round, when the predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first large winning opening 36 finishes the short opening (the section where the opening state is 0.1s) and becomes the closed state, it is displaced. By forcibly controlling the member 39 to maintain the inactive state, the specific region 38A remains in the closed state. That is, the first R of the specific region 38A ends without being in the open state of 8 s defined as the longest operating period by the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIG.
When the 1st round ends, the 2nd round starts after the 2s of the inter-round interval has elapsed. Also in the 2nd round, the displacement member 39 operates based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. 11 with the start of the open state of the first prize opening 36, which is linked to the opening and closing of the first prize opening 36. As described above, the specific region 38A is in the open state and the closed state.
Then, in the 2nd round, when the first large winning opening 36 ends the middle opening (the section where the opening state is 1.6s) and becomes the closed state (the end of the round section), when the predetermined monitoring processing time elapses. , The displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, and the specific area 38A is changed from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A is closed after an open state of about 2.6 s, which is shorter than 8 s defined as the longest operating period by the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIG.

On the other hand, as shown as an example in FIG. 15B, in the "hit pattern 8", the displacement member 39 is based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. 11 with the start of the open state of the first large winning opening 36. Is activated, the specific area 38A is opened and closed so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the first large winning opening 36. More specifically, the displacement member 39 is forced when a predetermined monitoring processing time elapses after the first large winning opening 36 finishes the middle opening (the section where the opening state is 1.6s) and becomes the closed state. By being controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, the specific area 38A is changed from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific region 38A is closed after an open state of about 4.6 s, which is shorter than 8 s defined as the longest operating period by the displacement member operating pattern shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, the same opening / closing pattern as the "hit pattern 7" (opening / closing pattern E + interval pattern b + opening / closing pattern F) and the "hit pattern 8" (pattern G) is used. However, it is not necessary to have exactly the same opening / closing pattern, and it may be substantially the same. For example, in the relationship between the "hit pattern 7" and the "hit pattern 8", the opening time and / or the closing time may be set within an error of 0.3 seconds or less.

[Game state and production mode of the game machine]
Next, the gaming state and the effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a normal mode, a first time saving mode, a second time saving mode, and a probability variation mode are implemented as effect modes in the normal gaming state.
This pachinko gaming machine stays in any of the production modes by differentiating at least a part of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4, the sound output from the speakers 10a to 10c, and the light emitting mode by the lamp / LED 27. It has a configuration that can recognize whether or not it is being performed, and it is possible to execute an effect that gives a different impression in each effect mode.
The normal mode is a production mode in a non-probability / non-time saving game state. In the normal mode, an impression different from that of the first time saving mode, the second time saving mode, and the probability variation mode is performed.

In the normal mode, the jackpot is based on the first special symbol, and after the jackpot is completed, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the first time saving mode or the probability variation mode. More specifically, if a V prize is won during a big hit, a lottery will be held to determine whether or not to shift to the probabilistic mode. Move to. If V is not won during the big hit, the mode shifts to the first time saving mode.

The first time-saving mode is an effect mode in a probabilistic game state or a non-probability-changing game state, and a time-saving game state. The first time-saving mode is an effect mode that impresses that the time-saving mode has a relatively small number of games (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol, that is, the number of games of the special symbol game).
In the 1st time saving mode, it becomes a hit based on the 2nd special symbol ("probability change big hit 3" or "probability change big hit 4"), and after the hit is completed, the 1st time saving mode is continued or the probability change from the 1st time saving mode. Move to mode. More specifically, if the V prize is not won during the hit, the first time saving mode is continued, and if the V prize is won during the hit, the mode shifts to the probability variation mode.
In the first time saving mode, the hit is based on the second special symbol (“small hit 2”), and after the hit is completed, the first time saving mode is continued or the first time saving mode is shifted to the probability variation mode. More specifically, if the V prize is won during the hit, or if the V prize is not won during the hit, and the probabilistic game state is not reached after the end of the hit, the first time saving mode is continued. On the other hand, if the V prize is not won during the hit, and if the probabilistic game state is after the end of the hit, the mode shifts to the probabilistic mode.
In the first time saving mode, the hit is based on the second special symbol (“probability variation big hit 5” or “small hit 1”), and after the hit is completed, the first time saving mode is continued, or the first time saving mode is changed to the first. 2 Shift to short-time mode. More specifically, if the V prize is not won during the hit, the mode shifts to the first time saving mode. If a V is won during the hit and the game is not in the probabilistic game state after the end of the hit, the mode shifts to the second time saving mode.
When the time saving game state ends, the mode shifts from the first time saving mode to the normal mode. Further, in S466 described later, the mode may be promoted from the first time saving mode to the second time saving mode.

The second time-saving mode is an effect mode in the probabilistic game state or the non-probable change game state and the time-saving game state. The second time saving mode is an effect mode that impresses that the time saving mode has a relatively large number of games.
In the second time saving mode, the hit is based on the second special symbol, and after the hit is completed, the effect mode continues or shifts as in the first time saving mode.
When the time saving game state ends, the mode shifts from the second time saving mode to the normal mode. Further, in S466 described later, the mode may be promoted from the second time saving mode to the probability variation mode.

The probabilistic mode is an effect mode in the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state. The probabilistic mode is an effect mode indicating that the probabilistic game state is fixed.
In the probability variation mode, the hit is based on the second special symbol, and after the hit is completed, basically, the effect mode continues or shifts as in the first time saving mode. However, in the probability variation mode, the hit is based on the second special symbol (“probability variation big hit 5” or “small hit 1”), and if a V prize is won during the hit, the probability variation mode continues after the hit is completed. It will be.
When the time saving game state (probability change game state) ends, the mode shifts from the probability change mode to the normal mode.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, the processes executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 17 to 36.

[Main processing by main CPU]
17 and 18 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 17, in S10, the main CPU 61 performs the watchdog timer disable setting process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S11.

In S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in a power failure detection state. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that it is in the power failure detection state and processing is transferred to S12. If the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that it is not in the power failure detection state and processing is performed in S13. Transfer.

In S13, the main CPU 61 performs the sub-control reception reception wait processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 waits until the sub-control circuit 70 receives a signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S14.

In S14, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting writing to the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S15.

In S15, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 7) is ON. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S30 (see FIG. 18) when it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, and shifts to S16 when it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON. Move the process.

In S16, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S17 when it determines that there is a power failure detection flag, and shifts the process to S30 (see FIG. 18) when it determines that there is no power failure detection flag. ..

In S17, the main CPU 61 performs a process of checking the damage in the work area and calculating the work damage check value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S19 when it determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, and shifts the process to S30 when it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value. ..

In S19, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting 7FFEH in the stack pointer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 61 performs the initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S21.

In S21, the main CPU 61 performs the probability change state display notification setting process at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main CPU 61 displays that the jackpot winning probability is in the high probability state in the case of the probability variation game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S22. The display to be notified may be configured to end at the first fluctuation start or fluctuation end after the power is turned on.

In S22, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power failure to the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial settings of devices around the main CPU 61. When this processing is completed, the processing is transferred to S24, and the processing is returned to the address before the power failure, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter returned from the stack area.

As shown in FIG. 18, in S30, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the stack pointer to 8000H. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S31.

In S31, the main CPU 61 performs a process of acquiring the initial value of the random number related to the hit determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 61 performs the entire work area clearing process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an initial value of a random number related to the hit determination. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 61 performs the initial setting process of the work area at the time of the initialization of the RAM. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 61 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub-control circuit 70. Further, in the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 is initialized based on the received command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 61 performs initial settings of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S37.

In S37, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt prohibition process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of prohibiting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 61 performs the initial value random number update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 61 performs an interrupt permission process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number for selecting the effect condition. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63, and if the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the process is transferred to S42 and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3. If it is not the above, the process is transferred to S37.

In S42, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. In this process, the main CPU 61 measures the waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and the opening time of the big winning opening that opens when a big hit or a small hit occurs. Large winning opening opening time timer, security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal plate 80 when it is detected that there is a fraudulent activity, etc. , Executes the process of updating various timers. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol control process. The main CPU 61 extracts a hit determination random value and a hit symbol determination random value according to the detection signals from the first start port switch 320 and the second start port switch 330, and determines the jackpot stored in the main ROM 62. With reference to the table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery (lottery for big hits and small hits) has been won, and the result of the determination is stored in the main RAM 63. The special symbol control process of S44 will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S45.

In S45, the main CPU 61 normally performs a symbol control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the normal symbol determination random value and the normal symbol determination random value according to the detection signal from the passing gate switch 350, and stores the extracted normal symbol determination random value and the main ROM 62. Based on the ordinary symbol winning table (not shown), it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol lottery has been won, and the result of this determination, the random value for determining the ordinary symbol, and the ordinary symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 62. Based on (not shown), it is determined whether the symbol is a lost symbol or a hit symbol, and a process of storing the result of the determination is performed. If the normal symbol lottery is won, the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, and if the non-winning symbol is won, the result of the determination indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, the blade member 34 is opened three times in 1.3 seconds, four times in 1.4 seconds, or six times in 1.8 seconds, for example. .. That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the blade member 34 is opened, and when the blade member 34 is in the open state, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 33. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S46.

In S46, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol display device control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits a control signal for driving the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the normal symbol control process. Performs the process of storing in. The main CPU 61 transmits the control signal to the LED unit 5. Based on the received control signal, the LED unit 5 causes the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 to display the first special symbol or the second special symbol in a variable manner and a stop display. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 fluctuates and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S47.

In S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 generates data related to the game information signal to be transmitted to the stand computer or the hall computer 100, and performs a process of storing the data in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S48.

In S48, the main CPU 61 performs a symbol hold quantity data generation process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has the first start port switches 320 and the second, which are detected in the special symbol-related switch check process and the normal symbol-related switch check process (S91, S92 in FIG. 21) in the timer interrupt process described later. The first is based on the detection signal from the start port switch 330 and the passing gate switch 350, and the update result of the hold quantity data stored in the main RAM 63 which is updated according to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. A process of storing a control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S49.

In S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting a control signal stored in the main RAM 63 from each port in the above steps or the like. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal plate 80, an LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LED, a first grand prize opening shutter 361A, and a first grand prize. It supplies solenoid power for driving the solenoid that opens and closes the mouth shutter 361B and the second prize-winning mouth shutter 371A and opens and closes the blade member 34. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S50.

In S50, the main CPU 61 performs command control processing related to the winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling a winning opening-related command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S37.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the gaming processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 61]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following step units. The main CPU 61 may interrupt the main process and execute the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. This timer interrupt process is a process performed according to a clock pulse generated from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms). In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes the interrupt process.

As shown in FIG. 19, in S60, the main CPU 61 performs a register save process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S61.

In S61, the main CPU 61 performs a timer update process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of increasing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63 by +1. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing a predetermined process (special symbol control process, etc.) on condition that the timer interrupt process is started a predetermined number of times (three times). The timer update process of S61 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacity of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the initial reset circuit 64 to the main CPU 61 A system reset signal is output to. The main CPU 61 enters the system reset state when a system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 61 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates random numbers such as a hit determination random number counter, a hit symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination random number counter, and an effect condition determination random number counter. If the update timing of the counter value is undefined, the random number counter for hit judgment and the random number counter for hit symbol determination will be unfair. Therefore, in order to guarantee this, the timing is fixed every 2 ms. I am trying to update with. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 61 performs a switch input process. As will be described in detail later, in this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each winning area or the like has detected a winning. When, for example, the main CPU 61 detects a winning, the bit corresponding to the winning area determined to have won is set to "1 (ON)". The switch input process of S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S65.

In S65, the main CPU 61 performs a payout control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 wins a game ball in the first large winning opening 36A, the first large winning opening 36B, the second large winning opening 37A, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40. It checks whether or not it has been done, and if there is a prize, the payout request command corresponding to each is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out the prize ball corresponding to the winning area in which the bit is "1 (ON)" with the winning of the game ball from the payout device 83, and also sets the set command. Is transmitted to the payout / launch control circuit 82. When this command is set, the bit corresponding to the winning area that triggered the command set is controlled to "0 (OFF)". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub-control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S67.

In S67, the main CPU 61 performs a register reset process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of returning the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this processing is completed, this timer interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Timer update process]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a timer update process executed by the main CPU 61. This timer update process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 20, in S70, the main CPU 61 adds 1 to the value of the system timer monitoring timer. The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (started). In the present embodiment, when the number of times the timer interrupt process is executed (started) reaches a predetermined condition (3 times), a predetermined process (special symbol control process, etc.) is executed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S71.

In S71, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the waiting time timer. The waiting time timer is a timer for timing various execution waiting times. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S72.

In S72, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0". The residual ball monitoring timer reaches the ball passage from the first big winning opening 36A to the first big winning opening 1st count switch 360A, and from the first big winning opening 36B to the first big winning opening 2nd count switch 360B. This is a timer for measuring the residual ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the remaining balls remaining in the ball passage from the second large winning opening 37A to the second large winning opening count switch 370. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0", it shifts the process to S77, and when it determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77. , S73. If the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0" and the game ball is detected by the large winning opening count switch when the round game is not in progress, an error may be notified.

In S73, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the residual ball monitoring timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S74.

In S74, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0", it shifts the process to S77, and when it determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77. , S75.

In S75, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area 38A is open. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S77 when it determines that the specific area 38A is not open, and shifts the process to S76 when it determines that the specific area 38A is open.

In S76, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the specific area closure data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data for closing the specific area 38A, and drives the displacement member solenoid 390 based on the control signal based on this data. As a result, the displacement member 39 is driven so as to close the specific region 38A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S77.

In S77, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". The discharge monitoring timer is a timer for measuring the discharge ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the discharge balls discharged by winning the first prize opening 36A and the first prize opening 36B. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S80 when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0", and when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not "0", it is S78. Move the process to. In the present embodiment, a smaller value (shorter time) is set in the residual ball monitoring timer than in the discharge monitoring timer, but they may be the same or a larger value (longer time).

In S78, the main CPU 61 subtracts 1 from the value of the discharge monitoring timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S79.

In S79, the main CPU 61 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not "0", it terminates this timer update processing routine, and when it determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is "0". Moves the process to S80.

In S80, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is "1" or "2". The large winning opening opening count counter is a counter used to identify the 1st or 2nd R opening and closing of the first large winning opening 36. Therefore, the value of the large winning opening opening count counter does not count the number of times that the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37A are actually opened, but is added by 1 for each round. is there. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is neither "1" nor "2", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S82, and the value of the large winning opening opening counter is set to S82. If it is determined to be "1" or "2", the process is transferred to S81.

In S81, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 terminates this timer update processing routine, and the control state flag indicates processing during opening of the large winning opening. If it is determined that the value is not (04H), the process is transferred to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first large winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the ejection ball counter. The first large winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the first large winning opening 36 detected by the first large winning opening count switch 360. The discharge ball counter is a counter for counting the number of discharge balls of the game ball detected by the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B. Basically, the value of the first large winning opening winning counter and the value of the ejection ball counter are the same. In this process, if the value of the first special winning opening winning counter is not larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 terminates this timer update processing routine, and the value of the first large winning opening winning counter becomes If it is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process is transferred to S83. The value set in the discharge monitoring timer is longer than the time required from the time when the game ball is detected by the first special winning opening count switch 360 to the time when it is detected by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. Corresponds to time. Therefore, if it is determined in this process that the value of the first large winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the ejection ball counter, the ball is clogged inside the first large winning opening 36, or the first large due to so-called goto action. It is assumed that only the winning opening count switch 360 is detected.

In S83, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The discharge error command corresponds to a command for notifying that the power has not been discharged normally. This discharge error command is transmitted in the command transmission control process in the timer interrupt process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the first large winning opening winning counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being sent repeatedly. When this processing is completed, the timer update processing routine is terminated. The discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the processing of S84.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a switch input process executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 21, in S90, the main CPU 61 performs a fraud detection switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor (not shown) capable of detecting radio waves, a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibration, and the like. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S91. If any of the above sensors is in the detected state, an error notification may be performed, and at that time, for example, even if the large winning opening count switch detects the winning of the game ball, the winning is invalidated. You may try to do it.

In S91, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol-related switch check process. This special symbol-related switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 61 performs a normal symbol-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input of the passing gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball is detected, and if it is determined that there is an input, the pending number is an upper limit (for example,). It is determined whether or not the number is 4), and if it is determined that the number is the upper limit, this process is terminated. When it is determined that it is not the upper limit, the hit judgment random number value is extracted from the hit judgment random number counter of the normal symbol game, and the hit symbol determination random number value is further extracted from the hit symbol determination random number counter. Performs the process of storing in the symbol storage area. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 61 performs a prize ball-related switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first starting port switch 320, and the second starting port switch 330 have been input. When it is determined that the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the general winning opening winning ball counter is performed, and the first starting port switch 320 or the second When it is determined that the start port switch 330 has been input, a process of adding 1 to the value of the start port winning counter corresponding to each is performed. When this processing is completed, this switch input processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol related switch check processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol-related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol-related switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 22, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs the first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 61 performs the second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S102.

In S102, the main CPU 61 performs the first large winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S103.

In S103, the main CPU 61 performs the second big winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, this special symbol-related switch check process routine is terminated.

[1st start port switch check process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This first start port switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 23, in S110, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 32 is detected based on the detection signal from the first starting port switch 320. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the first start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first start port switch 320 is "1 (ON)", and determines whether or not the bit is "1 (ON)", and the first start port. When the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is transferred to S111, and when the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", this first starting port is used. Terminates the switch check processing routine.

In S111, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start storages of the first special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the first start port switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the processing is transferred to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. , The process of extracting the random number value for determining the effect condition from the random number counter for determining the effect condition and storing it in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area includes the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit judgment random numbers are derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and various types acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 32 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number values of are sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S115.

In S115, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S116.

In S116, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. This start winning command includes information indicating a random number for determining a hit and information indicating a random number for determining a winning symbol. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that the game ball has won a prize and whether or not the winning lottery result has been won. Will be. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved ball to be displayed, when it is determined in the process of S115 that the winning effect is to be produced. This enables a so-called "look-ahead effect" in which the effect is executed based on the start memory before the variable execution. When this process is completed, the first start port switch check process routine is terminated.

[2nd start port switch check process]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second start port switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 24, in S120, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 33 is detected based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 330. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the bit of the second start port winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second start port switch 330 is "1 (ON)", and determines whether or not the bit is "1 (ON)", and the second start port. If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process is transferred to S121, and if the bit of the winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", this second starting port is used. Terminates the switch check processing routine.

In S121, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is 4 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start storages of the second special symbol, that is, the number of holdings is 4 or more. If it is determined that the number of holdings is 4 or more, the second start port switch check processing routine is terminated, and if it is determined that the number of holdings is not 4 or more, the processing is transferred to S122.

In S122, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S123.

In S123, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processes. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value of the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter. , The process of extracting the random number value for determining the effect condition from the random number counter for determining the effect condition and storing it in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area includes the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0). Judgment results based on the hit judgment random numbers are derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and various types obtained by winning a prize in the second starting port 33 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The random number values of are sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S124.

In S124, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the second special symbol variation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S125.

In S125, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to perform the winning effect based on the random number lottery. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S126.

In S126, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process is completed, the second start port switch check process routine is terminated.

[1st prize opening switch check process]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a first large winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This first prize opening switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 25, in S130, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball into the first winning opening 36 is detected based on the detection signal from the first winning opening count switch 360. Perform the processing to be performed. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36 is detected, the process is transferred to S131, and the winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36 is detected. If it is determined that the process is not performed, the process is transferred to S133.

In S131, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the first large winning opening winning counter. The first large winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 61 sets the first special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The first grand prize opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 wins the game ball to the first grand winning opening 36. Become aware. Also by this, for example, the total number of payouts (the number of payout prize balls) displayed during the big hit is additionally displayed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected based on the detection signal from the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is detected, it shifts the process to S134 and determines that the V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is not detected. In that case, the process is transferred to S142.

In S134, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S135.

In S135, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a specific area passage command. The specific area passage command is a command indicating that the game ball has passed (V winning) in the specific area 38A. The specific area passage command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the V prize in the specific area 38A. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S136.
If it is neither the 1st R nor the 2nd R in the small hit game state or the big hit game state, the specific area passage command may not be supplied to the sub CPU 71. Further, different types of specific area passing commands corresponding to each of the small hit gaming state and the big hit gaming state are provided, and the sub CPU 71 can identify which hit state the passage to the specific area 38A is. It may be configured as such.

In S136, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is "1" or "2". The large winning opening opening counter is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is neither "1" nor "2", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S142, and the value of the large winning opening opening counter is set to S142. If it is determined to be "1" or "2", the process is transferred to S137.

In S137, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag, which will be described later, is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S140, and the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening. ), The process is transferred to S138.

In S138, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag described later is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening or a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process. I do. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is "05H" or "06H", it shifts the process to S139, and when it determines that the control state flag is neither "05H" nor "06H". Moves the process to S142.

In S139, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than "0". The discharge monitoring timer is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than "0", it shifts the process to S140 and determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not larger than "0". The process is transferred to S142. In this process, if it is determined that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not larger than "0", it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred, and an error command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 70 to notify the error. You may try to do it.

In S140, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the specific area passage flag is "01H". The specific area passage flag is an internal flag whose value is set as "01H" when the V winning of the game ball is detected by the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area pass flag is "01H", it shifts the process to S142, and when it determines that the value of the specific area pass flag is not "01H", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S142. , S141.

In S141, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the specific area passage flag. The value "01H" of the specific area passage flag is also used as internal information indicating that the transition to the probabilistic gaming state is determined after the end of the jackpot gaming state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the passage of the game ball into the non-specific area 38B is detected based on the detection signal from the non-specific area switch 380B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is detected, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S143 and determines that the passage of the game ball to the non-specific area 38B is not detected. In that case, the process is transferred to S144.

In S143, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the discharge ball counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S144.

In S144, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first large winning opening winning counter is smaller than the value of the ejection ball counter. That is, the game ball is not detected by the first prize opening count switch 360, and the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the game ball is detected only by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. judge. In this process, if the value of the first large winning opening winning counter is not smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends the first large winning opening switch check processing routine and ends the first large winning opening. If the value of the winning counter is smaller than the value of the ejection ball counter, the process is transferred to S145.

In S145, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The discharge error command is as described above. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S146.

In S146, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the first large winning opening winning counter in the discharge ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being sent repeatedly. When this process is completed, the first large winning opening switch check process routine is terminated. The discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S146.

[2nd prize opening switch check process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a second large winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. This second big winning opening switch check process is executed in the following step units. As shown in FIG. 26, in S150, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the winning of the game ball into the second winning opening 37A is detected based on the detection signal from the second winning opening count switch 370. Perform the processing to be performed. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the game ball to the second major winning opening 37A is detected, the process is transferred to S151, and the winning of the game ball to the second major winning opening 37A is detected. If it is determined that this is not the case, the second major winning opening switch check processing routine is terminated.

In S151, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the second large winning opening winning counter. The second major winning opening winning counter is a counter for determining whether or not the maximum number of winnings per round has been reached. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 61 sets the second special winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The second major winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 wins a game ball into the second winning opening 37A. Become aware. As a result, for example, the total number of payouts (number of payout prize balls) displayed during the jackpot is additionally displayed. When this process is completed, the second large winning opening switch check process routine is terminated.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol control process is executed in the following step units. In FIG. 27, the numerical values shown on the sides of S161 to S168 indicate the control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control state flags in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63 according to the numerical value. As a result, the special symbol game will proceed.

As shown in FIG. 27, in the first S160, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading the control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads the control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S161.

In S161 to S168, which will be described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processes in each step based on the value of the control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the game of the special symbol game, and enables any of the processes in S161 to S168 to be executed. In addition, the main CPU 61 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer or the like set for each step. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the process in each step, and executes other subroutines. The main CPU 61 also executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

In S161, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol memory check process. The details of S161 will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S162.

In S162, the main CPU 61 executes the special symbol fluctuation time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (01H) indicating the special symbol fluctuation time management, and when the fluctuation time elapses, sets the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management to the control state flag. Set and set the waiting time (for example, 600ms) after confirmation in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S163 after the waiting time has elapsed after the confirmation. The details of S162 will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol display time management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a big hit or a small hit when the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management and the waiting time elapses after the confirmation. When the main CPU 61 is a big hit or a small hit, the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management is set in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the hit start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, the process of S164 is set to be executed after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game when it is not a big hit or a small hit. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S163 will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S164.

In S164, the main CPU 61 executes the hit start interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a control state flag having a value (03H) indicating hit start interval management, and when the time corresponding to the hit start interval elapses, the first grand prize read from the main ROM 62 The data for opening the mouth shutter 361A and the first prize-winning mouth shutter 361B and the data for opening the displacement member 39 are stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the process of S49 of FIG. 18, the main CPU 61 provides data and a displacement member 39 for opening the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first large winning opening shutter 361B stored in the main RAM 63. The data for opening is read out, and the signal to open the first large winning opening shutter 361A and the first large winning opening shutter 361B and the signal to open the displacement member 39 are sent to the first large winning opening first shutter solenoid. It is supplied to the 3610A, the first large winning opening second shutter solenoid 3610B, and the displacement member solenoid 390. As a result, the main CPU 61 controls the opening and closing of the first large winning opening 36. That is, a predetermined advantageous game state (a game in which the first large winning opening 36 first changes into an open state in which a game ball is easily accepted and a closed state in which it is difficult to accept the game ball as a period from the start of one round to the interval. The game state is executed when one round game in which the state) is provided is repeated a predetermined number of times. In this case, a small hit game state in which only the first large winning opening 36 is opened and closed twice or three times may be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the first prize opening 36 is always opened and closed first, but the second prize opening 37A may be opened and closed first, or the first first prize opening 37A may be opened and closed first. The large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37A may be arbitrarily selected and opened / closed.

Further, the main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag, and sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 7.1 s of the opening / closing pattern D per round) to the large winning opening opening time. Set in the timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S166. The details of S164 will be described later with reference to FIG. 32. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 61 executes the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening. In this process, the main CPU 61 has a control state flag having a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the inter-round interval (interval patterns a and b) has elapsed, The memory is updated so that the number of times the large winning opening opening counter is increased by "1". The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 7.1 s of the opening / closing pattern D per round) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, it is set to execute the process of S166. In this process, the main CPU 61 also performs a process for controlling the opening / closing of the displacement member 39. The details of S165 will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S166.

In S166, the main CPU 61 executes the process during the opening of the large winning opening. In this process, when the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating that the large winning opening is open, the main CPU 61 has elapsed the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, and the opening upper limit time has elapsed ( It is determined whether or not any of the conditions that the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When any of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 in order to close the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37A. Then, it is determined whether or not the condition that the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or more than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number (the final round) is satisfied. The main CPU 61 sets a value (06H) indicating a winning end interval in the control state flag when it is the final round, and a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before reopening the large winning opening when it is not the final round. To the control status flag. The details of S166 will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S167.

In S167, the main CPU 61 executes the hit end interval management process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flag to a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval, and when the time corresponding to the hit end interval elapses, the main CPU 61 controls the value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. Set to flag. That is, it is set to execute the process of S168. The details of S167 will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S168.

In S168, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol game end process. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a value (00H) indicating the special symbol memory check when the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S161. The details of S168 will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. When this process is completed, the special symbol control process routine is terminated.

As described above, by setting the control state flag, the special symbol game is executed. Specifically, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is lost. ) And (07H) in this order, the processes of S161, S162, S163, and S168 shown in FIG. 27 are executed at predetermined timings. Further, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags (00H), (01H), (02H) when the result of the hit determination is the big hit or the small hit. ), The processes of S161, S162, and S163 shown in FIG. 27 are executed at predetermined timings, and control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. Further, when the control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed, the main CPU 61 sets the control state flags in the order of (03H), (04H), and (05H), so that FIG. 27 shows. The processes of S164, S166, and S165 shown above are executed at predetermined timings, and the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. When the end condition of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is satisfied, the processes of S165, S167 to S168 shown in FIG. 27 are performed by setting (04H), (06H), and (07H) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit game state or the small hit game state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special symbol memory check process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol memory check process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 28, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag has a value (00H) indicating a special symbol memory check. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol memory check, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S171. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, the main CPU 61 ends this special symbol storage check processing routine.

In S171, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the presence / absence of start memory. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is no start memory of the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start storage. If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S172. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is a start memory, the process is transferred to S173.

In S172, the main CPU 61 performs a demo display process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display permission value in the main RAM 63. Further, the state in which the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area in which the random value for hit determination is stored) becomes "0" is a predetermined time (for example, 30 s). If it is maintained, set the value that allows execution of the demo display as the demo display permission value. Then, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demo display command when the demo display permission value is a predetermined value. The demo display command stored in this way is supplied as a demo display command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. As a result, the demo display is executed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this processing is completed, the special symbol memory check processing routine is terminated.

In S173, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". That is, when it is determined that no data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process is transferred to S174. When it is determined that the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), S175 Move the process to.

In S174, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S176.

In S175, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S176.

In S176, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S177.

In S177, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol storage transfer process. In this process, when the special symbol to be variablely displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 first displays the data of the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). When the special symbol that shifts (stores) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3) and is displayed in a variable manner is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area A process of shifting (storing) each of the data from the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) is executed. To do. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S178.

In S178, the main CPU 61 executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 has one jackpot from a plurality of jackpot determination tables (not shown) in which the number of determination values (big hit determination values) to be jackpots differs depending on whether or not the game status flag indicates a probability variation gaming state. Select the judgment table. That is, when the game state flag is a value indicating the probability variation game state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and when the game status flag is not a value indicating the probability variation game state, the jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment table for the non-probability variable game state with few is referred to. In this way, when the game state flag is a value indicating the probability change game state, that is, when the game state is the probability change game state as a special game state in which it is easy to shift to the specific game state (big hit game state), the jackpot game state is set. The probability of transition is higher than that of the probabilistic gaming state as the special gaming state, as compared to the non-probability changing gaming state as the non-special gaming state in which it is difficult to shift to the specific gaming state.

The special gaming state is a probabilistic / short-time gaming state, and the non-special gaming state is basically a non-probable / non-short-time gaming state. It also includes the case where the game is in a short game state.

Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted at the time of winning the game ball, and is for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Refer to the random number value and the selected jackpot judgment table. Then, when the hit determination random value and the jackpot determination value match, the main CPU 61 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to set the jackpot game state which is advantageous to the player.

The jackpot probability due to winning the first starting port 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability due to winning the second starting port 33.

In this way, in the process of S178, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S179.

In S179, the main CPU 61 executes the small hit determination process when it is determined in the big hit determination process of S178 that the lottery for the big hit has not been won. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a small hit determination table that defines a determination value (small hit determination value) that is a small hit regardless of the game state flag.

Then, the main CPU 61 sets the hit determination random value of the special symbol start storage area extracted at the time of winning the game ball and set in the second special symbol start storage area (0), and the selected small hit determination table. refer. Then, when the hit determination random value and the small hit determination value match, the main CPU 61 determines that the hit is a small hit.

Since the small hit can be generated only in the second special symbol, the small hit determination process is performed only based on the hit determination random value stored in the second special symbol start storage area. 1 The small hit determination process may be performed based on the hit determination random value stored in the special symbol start storage area.

As described above, in the processing of S179, either a small hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and when neither the big hit determination processing of S178 nor the small hit determination processing of S179 is won, the special symbol is selected. Loss will be decided as the judgment result of the game. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S180.

In S180, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the big hit symbol when the result of the big hit determination is the big hit, and determines the small hit symbol when the result of the small hit determination is the small hit, and for either the big hit or the small hit. In the case of loss, the process of determining the loss pattern is performed. The details of S180 will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S181.

In S181, the main CPU 61 executes a special symbol variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines different fluctuation patterns based on the special symbol determined in the process of S180 and the results of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processes of S178 and S179. Select the variation pattern determination table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines the variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores the variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, the ST gaming state and the normal gaming state have different fluctuation pattern determination tables. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. This process is the same even during the ST gaming state.

The data indicating the variation pattern stored in this way is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is subjected to variable display in the variable pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, the data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this way is supplied as a fluctuation pattern designation command from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 61 performs a special symbol variation time setting process. In this process, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S183.

Then, in S183, the main CPU 61 executes a process of clearing the value of the storage area (0) used for the fluctuation display this time. When this processing is completed, the special symbol memory check processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 29, in S190, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, the process is transferred to S191. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S196.

In S191, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the fluctuation state number of the jackpot determined in S190 is a value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation is the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S192 when the variation state number is a value (01H) indicating that the variation is the first special symbol. On the other hand, in the main CPU 61, when the fluctuation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is, that is, the value (02H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the second special symbol. In that case, the process is transferred to S194.

In S192, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random value for determining the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shows the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol (shown in the first special symbol jackpot symbol distribution of FIG. 8) based on the hit symbol determination random value and the jackpot determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. A process of determining which of "probability variation 1", "probability variation 2", "time reduction 1", and "time reduction 2") is performed is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the jackpot symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 fluctuates the first special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S199.

In S194, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shows the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol (shown in the second special symbol jackpot symbol distribution of FIG. 8) based on the hit symbol determination random value and the jackpot determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. A process of determining which of "probability variation 3" to "probability variation 5" corresponds to) is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined jackpot symbol of the second special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the jackpot symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 fluctuates the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the jackpot stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S199.

In S196, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the result determined by the small hit determination process (S179 in FIG. 28) is a small hit. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S197 when a small hit is won. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S201 when the small hit is not won.

In S197, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining a small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 uses the small hit symbol of the second special symbol (the second special symbol small hit symbol of FIG. 8) based on the hit symbol determination random value and the small hit determination table extracted from the jackpot symbol determination counter. The process of determining whether the symbol is "small hit 1" or "small hit 2" shown in the distribution is performed. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S198.

In S198, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the determined small hit symbol of the second special symbol and a command set of the small hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 fluctuates the second special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command for the small hit symbol of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the small hit stop display mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S199.

In S199, the main CPU 61 performs a hit start interval display time data set process corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S200.

In S200, the main CPU 61 performs data set processing related to the number of times the large winning opening is opened. In this process, the main CPU 61 has data related to the number of times the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37A are opened, that is, "probability variation 1" and "probability variation 2" according to the first special symbol. Set the data corresponding to the symbols of "time reduction 1", "time reduction 2", or "probability variation 3" to "probability variation 5", or "small hit 1", "small hit 2" by the second special symbol in the main RAM 63. Perform processing. When this process is completed, this special symbol determination process routine is terminated.

On the other hand, in S201, when it is determined that the main CPU 61 is neither a big hit in S190 nor a small hit in S196, that is, it is lost, it performs a data set of lost symbols and a command set of lost symbols. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 fluctuates the special symbol and stops and displays it in a manner based on the data of the lost symbol of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies the command of the lost symbol from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub-control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the loss stop display mode. When this process is completed, this special symbol determination process routine is terminated.

[Special symbol fluctuation time management process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a special symbol fluctuation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol fluctuation time management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 30, in S210, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) indicates the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S211. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value (01H) does not indicate the special symbol fluctuation time management, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine.

In S211 the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S212. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is terminated.

In S212, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management in the special symbol control state flag, and shifts the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. Then, the symbol stop command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a symbol stop command, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S214.

In S214, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. When this processing is completed, the special symbol fluctuation time management processing routine is terminated.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol display time management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 31, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process is transferred to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management process routine.

In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is "0". When the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

In S222, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S223. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S224.

In S223, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the game state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a normal game state (non-probability change / non-time reduction) in the game state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S233.

In S224, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "0". The time saving number counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (number of symbol fluctuations) in the time saving game state. When the value of the time reduction counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S226. On the other hand, when the value of the time reduction counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S225.

In S225, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S226.

In S226, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is "0". The probability variation count counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of games (symbol variation count) in the probability variation game state. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S228. On the other hand, if the value of the probability variation counter is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S227.

In S227, the main CPU 61 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the probability variation counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S228.

In S228, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to change the game state according to the values of the time reduction counter and the probability variation counter and the value of the game state flag. More specifically, when the main CPU 61 performs the processing of S225 and the value of the time reduction counter becomes "0", or when the processing of S225 is performed and the value of the probability variation counter becomes "0". , Judge that the game state is changed. When the game state is changed, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S229. On the other hand, when the game state is not changed, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S231.

In S229, the main CPU 61 performs the game state flag change process. More specifically, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value in the game state flag of the main RAM 63 according to the values of the time reduction counter and the probability variation counter. The main CPU 61 is in a non-time reduction game state when the value of the time reduction counter is "0", a time reduction game state when it is "1" or more, and a non-probability change game when the value of the probability variation counter is "0". If the state is "1" or more, it is judged to be a probabilistic game state, "00H" in the non-probability / non-time saving game state, "01H" in the non-probability / time saving game state, and the probabilistic / non-time saving game state. In the case of, "02H" is set in the game state flag, and in the case of the probability change / time saving game state, "03H" is set in the game state flag.

In S230, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing, etc.) a game state command in the main RAM 63. The game state command is the type of command (information indicating that it is a game state command), information indicating the game state (non-probability / non-time reduction, probabilistic / non-time reduction, non-probability / time reduction, probabilistic / time reduction), and the number of probable changes. This command includes information indicating the remaining number of times (“0” or “40”) and information indicating the remaining number of times (“0” or “40”) as the number of time reductions. The game state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the status of the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S231.

In S231, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it shifts the process to S232. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it shifts the process to S236.

In S232, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S233. In the present embodiment, as an example, the hit start interval time corresponding to the first special symbol is 15498 ms when the jackpot symbol is “probability variation 1” and 11496 ms when the jackpot symbol is another jackpot symbol. The hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol is 11496 ms when the big hit symbol is "probability variation 3", 996 ms when the jackpot symbol is "probability variation 4", and the small hit symbol is "small hit 2". In the case, it is 3996 ms. Further, the hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol is 3996 ms, which is the same when the big hit symbol is "probability variation 5" and when the small hit symbol is "small hit 1".

In S233, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 starts the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state and showing a specific hit pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern in the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S234.

In S234, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening opening number counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S235.

In S235, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

In S236, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (07H) indicating the end process of the special symbol game as a control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is terminated.

[Hit start interval management process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit start interval management process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 32, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the process is transferred to S241. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management process routine.

In S241, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S242. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the hit start interval management processing routine.

In S242, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the process to S243. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the process to S245.

In S243, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) an upper limit value on the value of the large winning opening opening number counter in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and shifts the process to S244.

In S244, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter, and shifts the process to S245.

In S245, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening opening / closing pattern according to the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the pattern (hit pattern) shown in FIG. 12 corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol determined in S245. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S246.

In S246, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a display command during opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command for opening the large winning opening is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S247.

In S247, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening to the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S248.

In S248, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S249.

In S249, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the discharge ball counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S250.

In S250, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set as 15.1s when the time corresponding to the value (number of rounds) of the large winning opening opening counter, for example, if the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is the 1st round of "probability change 1". Will be done. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S251.

In S251, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the first special winning opening 36 or the second special winning opening 37A. The variable stored in this way drives the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 3610 or the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 3710 to open the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37A. Become. When this process is completed, the hit start interval management process routine is terminated.
In the present embodiment, in the case of the 1st round in the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the first big winning opening 36 is always opened, so the data for opening the first big winning opening 36 is set. To. Further, although the data for opening / closing the specific area 38A is also set here, the data for opening / closing the specific area 38A may be set in another process.

[Waiting time management process before reopening the big prize opening]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which is executed by the main CPU 61. This waiting time management process before reopening the big winning opening is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 33, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, the process is transferred to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management processing routine before reopening the large winning opening.

In S261, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S262. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time management processing routine before reopening the large winning opening.

In S262, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding "1" to the value of the large winning opening opening number counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S263.

In S263, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing) a display command during opening of the large winning opening in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this case, the display command for opening the large winning opening is data indicating the start of the round game. The large winning opening opening display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a large winning opening opening display command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S264.

In S264, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating a process during opening of the large winning opening to the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S265.

In S265, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the large winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S266.

In S266, the main CPU 61 performs a process of clearing the value of the discharge ball counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S267.

In S267, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the opening time of the large winning opening in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S268.

In S268, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening opening data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the waiting time management process routine before reopening the large winning opening is terminated.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a process during opening of the large winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. This process during opening of the winning opening is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 34, in S270, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the process of opening the large winning opening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (04H) indicating the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, the processing is transferred to S271. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (04H) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine during opening of the large winning opening.

In S271, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening winning counter is "10" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening winning counter is not "10" or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 61 executes the big winning opening opening / closing process according to the opening / closing pattern for each set round in the jackpot type and the current round, and shifts the process to S273.

In S273, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the opening time of the big winning opening is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S274. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the processing routine during the opening of the large winning opening.

In S274, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the large winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the big winning opening. The variable stored in this way closes the first special winning opening shutter solenoid 3610 or the second special winning opening shutter solenoid 3710. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the residual ball monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1098 ms is set as a predetermined value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the closed large winning opening is the first large winning opening 36. When the main CPU 61 determines that the closed large winning opening is the first large winning opening 36, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S277. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the closed large winning opening is not the first large winning opening 36, that is, the second large winning opening 37A, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S278.

In S277, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the discharge monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to, for example, 1998 ms is set as a predetermined value. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S278.

In S278, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it shifts the process to S283. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it shifts the process to S279.

In S279, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening number (number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the large winning opening opening number counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit value of the large winning opening opening number (number of rounds), and the value of the large winning opening opening number counter. Is greater than or equal to the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened. Here, the upper limit of the number of times the large winning opening is opened is, for example, 16R in the case of "probability variation 1" of the second special symbol. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit of the winning opening opening number, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S283. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is not equal to or greater than the upper limit of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S280.

In S280, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. The interval display time between rounds is set to the time corresponding to the interval patterns a and b, but a time different from these may be set. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S281.

In S281, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process is completed, the process routine during the opening of the large winning opening is terminated.

On the other hand, in S283, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S284.
In the present embodiment, as an example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the first special symbol is 7500 ms, "time reduction 1", and "time reduction 1" when the jackpot symbol is "probability variation 1" and "probability variation 2". The time reduction 2 is 12312 ms, and the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is 7500 ms when the jackpot symbol is “probability variation 3” and 12312 ms when the jackpot symbol is “probability variation 4”. , When the big hit symbol is "probability variation 5", and when the small hit symbol is "small hit 1" and "small hit 2", it is 4500 ms.
As another example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is set to 4500 ms or less for all the jackpot symbols, and the jackpot game state related to the second special symbol is more final than the first special symbol. The time from the end of the round to the end of the jackpot game state may be shortened.

In S284, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S285.

In S285, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. When this process is completed, the process routine during the opening of the large winning opening is terminated.

[Hit end interval management process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in the following step units.

In S290, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating a hit end interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the process is transferred to S291. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the process is transferred to S301.

In S291, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is "0". In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S292. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S301.

In S292, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game of the main RAM 63 in the special symbol control state flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S293.

In S293, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63 is "01H". If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is "01H", the process is transferred to S294. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is not "01H", the process is transferred to S298.

In S294, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to "03H". The game state flag "03H" indicates a probability change / time saving game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "70" as the number of STs in the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "70" as the number of time reductions in the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "00H" to the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S301.

In S298, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the small hit has ended. If it is determined that the small hit has ended, the process is transferred to S301. If it is determined that the small hit is not finished, the process is moved to S299.

In S299, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the game state flag of the main RAM 63 to "01H". The game state flag "01H" indicates a non-probability change / time saving game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S300.

In S300, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "30" or "70" as the number of time reductions in the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 63. More specifically, when the jackpot symbol is "time reduction 1" or "time reduction 2" and does not shift to the probabilistic gaming state, the main CPU 61 sets "30" as the number of time reductions, and the jackpot symbols are "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 1" to ". When "Probability change 5" does not shift to the probability change game state, "70" is set as the number of working hours. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S301.

In S301, the main CPU 61 sets a game state command and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The game state command indicates the type of the finished hit game state (big hit, small hit) in addition to the information indicating the game state controlled after the end of the big hit game state and the remaining number of time reductions (remaining time reduction number). A command that contains information. The game state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 36, in S310, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the control state flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the processing is transferred to S311. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol game end processing routine.

In S311 the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check in the main RAM 63 as a control state flag. When this process is completed, the special symbol game end process routine is terminated.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, the processes executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 37 to 50. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processes such as display control processing.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the sub CPU 71. This main process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 37, in S320, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of initializing in response to a power-on. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S321.

In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating a random number value (a random number counter value for determining an effect, a random number counter value for determining a stop symbol, etc.) stored in the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S322.

In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. The details of this process will be described later, but the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S323. The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

In S323, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for displaying in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. The display control circuit 76 including the VDP (Video Display Processor) outputs various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and effect image data based on the data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 71. It is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S324.

In S324, the sub CPU 71 performs voice control processing for controlling the sounds generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c via the voice control circuit 77. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S325.

In S325, the sub CPU 71 executes a lamp control process for controlling light emission (lighting / blinking) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S326.

In S326, the sub CPU 71 performs the movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process for controlling the movable effect device 42 that drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S321, and thereafter, the processes of S321 to S326 are repeated.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main process and execute the command reception interrupt process or the timer interrupt process even when the main process is being executed. Hereinafter, the command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 38, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 38, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S331.

In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the receive buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the receive buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed by the command analysis process of FIG. 41. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S332.

In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the program saved in S330 to each register. When this processing is completed, the command reception interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 39, in S340, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the running program stored in each register (storage area). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S341.

In S341, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processes. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S342. The timer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting the presence or absence of an operation of the pressing operation button 9A. This process is actually a determination process, but since it is an interrupt process, it will be described here as one routine. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S343.

In S343, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of returning the program saved in S340 to each register. When this processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing routine is terminated.

[Timer update process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a timer update process executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer update process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 40, in S350, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”. The discharge error notification timer is a timer for measuring the time for notifying the discharge error. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is "0", the process is transferred to S354. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S351.

In S351, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the discharge error notification timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S352.

In S352, the sub CPU 71 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge error notification timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is "0", the process is transferred to S353. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not "0", the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S354.

In S353, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the discharge error notification flag to "00H". The discharge error notification flag is a flag that allows the sub CPU 71 to identify whether or not to notify the discharge error. In the case of "00H", the discharge error is not notified (finished), and "01H". In the case of, the discharge error will be notified. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S354.

In S354, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the firing stop notification timer is “0”. The launch stop notification timer is a timer for timing the time for notifying the launch stop (such as the effect "STOP"). If it is determined that the value of the firing stop notification timer is "0", the process is transferred to S358. If it is determined that the value of the firing stop notification timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S355.

In S355, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the firing stop notification timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S356.

In S356, the sub CPU 71 again performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the firing stop notification timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the firing stop notification timer is not "0", the process is transferred to S358. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the firing stop notification timer is "0", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S357.

In S357, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the launch stop notification flag. The launch stop notification flag is a flag that allows the sub CPU 71 to identify whether or not to notify the launch stop. In the case of "00H", the launch stop notification is not performed (finished), and "01H". In the case of, the notification of the suspension of launch is given (continued). When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S358.

In S358, the sub CPU 71 performs other timer update processing. When this processing is completed, the timer update processing routine is terminated.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 41, in S360, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not a command has been received. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has been received, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S361. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends this command analysis processing routine.

In S361, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command and performs processing according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. When the reading of the data of the received command is completed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S362.

In S362, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is received as the command read in S361. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S363. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S365.

In S363, the sub CPU 71 performs an effect pattern determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the effect pattern including the variation display mode of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern designation command. When the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data corresponding to the determined effect pattern in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S364.

In S364, the sub CPU 71 executes the first effect mode change process. The first effect mode change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S365, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designation command is received as the command read in S361. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S366. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S367.

In S366, the sub CPU 71 performs a stop symbol determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decoration symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

The decorative symbols to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers "1" to "7", and these decorative symbols (numbers) are a predetermined number (for example, three (three digits)). When the same decorative symbols (numbers) are used, the game basically shifts to the jackpot game state. Specifically, "probability change 1", "probability change 2", "time reduction 1", "time reduction 2" as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, and "probability variation 3" to "probability variation 3" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. Regarding "5" and "small hit 1" and "small hit 2" as small hit symbols, the decorative symbols corresponding to "probability variation 1", "probability variation 2", "time reduction 1", and "time reduction 2" are numbers. The decorative pattern corresponding to any of the "1", "2", "4", "5", or "6" alignments, "probability variation 3", and "probability variation 4" is the number "3" or " The decorative symbols corresponding to the "7" alignment, "probability variation 5", and "small hit 1" figures correspond to the specific rolls, "small hit 2", which are the numbers "-hit-" as a combination of specific symbols. The decorative design has a specific number that is a combination of the specific design, and the decorative design corresponding to the loss is a random number other than the specific number. The stop symbol does not have to correspond to the specific symbol.

In S367, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command is received as the command read in S361. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S368. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S369.

In S368, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern determination process. In this hit effect pattern determination process, the hit effect patterns related to all the hits are determined, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 42. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S369, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a specific area passing command has been received as the command read in S361. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the command for passing through a specific area has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S370. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command for passing through a specific area has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S371.

In S370, the sub CPU 71 executes the V winning notification process. In this V winning notification process, the effect control is performed based on the passage of the game vs. the medium to the specific area, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S371, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the large winning opening opening display command is received as the command read in S361. When the sub CPU 71 determines that it has received the large winning opening opening display command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S372. On the other hand, when it is determined that the sub CPU 71 has not received the large winning opening opening display command as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S373.

In S372, the sub CPU 71 executes the effect processing during the round. In this in-round effect processing, processing for executing the effect during the round game is performed, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 44. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S373, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the inter-round display command is received as the command read in S361. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S374. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S375.

In S374, the sub CPU 71 executes the inter-round effect processing. In this inter-round effect processing, processing for executing the inter-round effect is performed, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 45. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S375, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit end display command is received as the command read in S361. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S376. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S377.

In S376, the sub CPU 71 executes the hit end effect process. In this hit end effect process, the effect control is performed at the hit end interval, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 46. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S377, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the game state command is received as the command read in S361. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S378. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S379.

In S378, the sub CPU 71 executes the second effect mode change process. In this second effect mode change process, effect control is performed according to the content of the received game state command, and the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S379, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a discharge error command has been received as the command read in S361. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S380. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S381.

In S380, the sub CPU 71 executes the discharge error notification process. In this discharge error notification process, processing for performing error notification control when a discharge error occurs is performed, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

In S381, the sub CPU 71 also executes processing corresponding to the received command. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

[Hit effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit effect pattern determination process is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 42, in S390, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any of "01H" to "06H" in the hit effect pattern flag according to the stop symbol designation information of the special symbol included in the received hit start display command. "01H" corresponds to the production contents of "Probability change 1" and "Probability change 2", "02H" corresponds to the production contents of "Time reduction 1" and "Time reduction 2", and "03H" corresponds to the production content of "Probability change 3". Corresponding to the content, "04H" corresponds to the production content of "Probability change 4", "05H" corresponds to the production content of "Probability change 5" and "Small hit 1", and "06H" corresponds to the production content of "Small hit 2". It is a value corresponding to the production content of. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S391.

In S391, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data according to the type of the hit pattern. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data (data corresponding to the value of the hit effect pattern flag) for executing the effect during the hit start interval. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is terminated. In addition, in order to recognize the hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute different effect patterns for each value of the hit effect pattern, but they may be the same.

[V prize notification processing]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the V winning notification process executed by the sub CPU 71. This V winning notification process is a process for notifying the V winning, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 43, in S400, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning flag is “01H”. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is "01H", the sub CPU 71 ends the V winning notification processing routine. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is not "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S401.

In S401, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the V winning flag. The V winning flag is an internal flag indicating whether or not the V winning notification has been performed. When the V prize is notified, "01H" is set as the value of the V prize flag, and when the V prize is not notified, "00H" is set as the value of the V prize flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S402.

In S402, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "01H" or "02H". In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the jackpot of the first special symbol is in progress. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "01H" nor "02H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S405. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "01H" or "02H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S403.
When the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" (during the big hit of "time reduction 1" or "time reduction 2"), V is basically not won, so the determination of S402 may not be performed. Further, when the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H", the transition to the probability variation mode may be determined without fail in S403 described later.

In S403, the sub CPU 71 performs the probability change mode transition determination process. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to shift to the probabilistic mode. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines that the sub CPU 71 shifts to the probabilistic mode at 1/10 when it is "probability 1" or "probability 2", and shifts to the probabilistic mode at 10/10 when it is "time reduction 1" or "time reduction 2". Judged to shift to. Any probability can be adopted as the above probability. For example, "probability variation 1", "probability variation 2", "time reduction 1", and "time reduction 2" may all have the same probability.

In S404, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to shift to the probabilistic mode. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the mode shifts to the probability variation mode, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S406. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the mode does not shift to the probability variation mode, the sub CPU 71 ends the V winning notification processing routine.

In S405, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "03H" to "05H". In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is in the second special symbol hit (excluding the hit of "small hit 2"). When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "03H" to "05H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S406. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "03H" to "05H", the sub CPU 71 ends the V winning notification processing routine.

In S406, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the V winning notification flag. When this process is completed, the V winning notification processing routine is terminated.
In this way, the value "01H" for notifying the V prize is set to V only when the determination is affirmative in the probability variation mode transition determination of S404 or when the second special symbol is hit (excluding the hit of "small hit 2"). Set to the winning notification flag. As a result, the notification of "V", for example, the effect image corresponding to the V prize is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, and a predetermined sound is generated by using the speakers 10a to 10c and the lamp / LED 27. And light emission is performed. In addition, it may be configured to notify at all hits, or may be configured not to notify. Further, it may be configured to notify only a part of the hits.

[Direction processing during the round]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during the round executed by the sub CPU 71. The effect processing during this round is a process for determining the effect content for each round, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 44, in S410, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S411.

In S411, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the round counter is "2" or less. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the V winning round is in progress (1st R or 2R). When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the round counter is "2" or less, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S412. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the round counter is larger than "2", the sub CPU 71 ends the effect processing routine during the round.

In S412, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H". In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a time saving jackpot (a jackpot of either "time saving 1" or "time saving 2"). When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H", the sub CPU 71 ends the effect processing routine during the round. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern is not "02H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S413.
In addition, in the case of a short-time jackpot, since it is difficult to win a V prize, it is not necessary to give a launch stop notification (for example, a notification of "STOP"). Although this determination process is provided, it is not necessary to provide this determination process.

In S413, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value to the value of the firing stop notification timer. For example, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to Y seconds (for example, 12 seconds) shorter than X seconds (for example, 12.1 seconds), which is the time from the start of the first opening to the middle opening of the displacement member 39. .. This value also corresponds to the timing shortly before the big winning opening opens the middle in the probability change jackpot. It should be noted that an appropriate value can be adopted within a range in which the V prize can be easily notified at a time. Further, different values may be set according to the type of hit. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S414.

In S414, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the launch stop notification flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S415.

In S415, the sub CPU 71 sets the hit effect pattern and the effect data during the round according to the round. In addition, in order to recognize the hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern, but the same effect pattern may be executed. When this process is completed, the effect processing routine during the round is terminated.

[Inter-round production processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an inter-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This inter-round effect processing is a process for determining the effect content between the target rounds, and is executed in the following step units. In S420 to S422, it is a process executed when the round ends while the production of "STOP" is being performed.

As shown in FIG. 45, in S420, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the launch stop notification flag is “01H”. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the launch stop notification flag is "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S421. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the launch stop notification flag is not "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S423.

In S421, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the launch stop notification flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S422.

In S422, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the firing stop notification timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S423.
The present embodiment is not limited to the above configuration. For example, if the V prize cannot be won in the 1st round, the production of "STOP" may be continued between rounds. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort and suggest that the V prize has not been won.

In S423, the sub CPU 71 sets the hit effect pattern and the inter-round effect data according to the round. In addition, in order to recognize the hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern, but the same effect pattern may be executed. When this process is completed, the inter-round effect processing routine is terminated.

[Hit end production process]
46 and 47 are flowcharts showing a hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in the hit end interval at the end of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 46, in S430, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the launch stop notification flag is “01H”. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the launch stop notification flag is "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S431. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the launch stop notification flag is not "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S433.

In S431, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the launch stop notification flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S432.

In S432, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the firing stop notification timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S433.

In S433, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is "01H". When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S434. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is not "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S444 of FIG. 47.

In S434, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "01H" to "04H". In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether it is a big hit of any of "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 4", "time reduction 1", and "time reduction 2". When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any of "01H" to "04H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S435. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of "01H" to "04H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S437.

In S435, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "04H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the probabilistic mode. In the present embodiment, the value of the effect mode flag "01H" corresponds to the normal mode, "02H" corresponds to the first time saving mode, "03H" corresponds to the second time saving mode, and "04H" corresponds to the probability variation mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S436.

In S436, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "70" to the value of the mode counter. As a result, the probability variation mode is executed up to a maximum of 70 games. The value of the mode counter is a value displayed on the liquid crystal display device 4 as described later. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S449 of FIG. 47.

In S437, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "05H". In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether it is a hit of "probability variation 5" or "small hit 1". When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "05H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S438. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "05H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S441.

In S438, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "02H". In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the natural effect mode of "probability variation 5" or "small hit 1" is the first time saving mode. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is "02H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S439. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is not "02H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S449 of FIG. 47.

In S439, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "03H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the second time saving mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S440.

In S440, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "70" to the value of the mode counter. As a result, the second time saving mode is executed up to a maximum of 70 games. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S449 of FIG. 47.
In S437 to S440, when the natural effect mode of "probability variation 5" or "small hit 1" is the first time saving mode, the mode shifts to the second time saving mode, and "70" is set in the mode counter value. It is configured in. However, this embodiment is not limited to the above configuration. For example, regardless of the type of effect mode in which the player is staying, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined value is set in the value of the mode counter at each hit end.

In S441, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning flag is "01H". In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a V prize has been won in "small hit 2". When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S442. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is not "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S444 of FIG. 47.

In S442, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "02H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the first time saving mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S443.

In S443, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "30" to the value of the mode counter. As a result, the first time saving mode is executed up to a maximum of 30 games. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S449 of FIG. 47.

In S444 of FIG. 47, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “06H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a "small hit 2". When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "06H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S445. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "06H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S446.

In S445, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the game state determination flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S449.

In S446, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "02H". More specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the V prize is not won during a hit other than the "small hit 2" and the natural effect mode is the first time saving mode. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is "02H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S449. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is not "02H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S447.

In S447, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "02H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the first time saving mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S448.

In S448, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the mode counter to "30". As a result, the first time saving mode is executed up to a maximum of 30 games. In the case of a probability variation jackpot (a jackpot of "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 5"), "70" may be set for the value of the mode counter, or a different value may be set. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S449.

In S449, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S450.

In S450, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the V winning flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S451.

In S451, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the V winning notification flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S452.

In S452, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the round counter to "0". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S453.

In S453, the sub CPU 71 sets the hit effect pattern and the hit end effect data according to the round. In addition, in order to recognize the ending hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern, but the same effect pattern may be executed. When this process is completed, the hit end effect processing routine is terminated.

[First effect mode change process]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a first effect mode change process executed by the sub CPU 71. This first effect mode change process is a process for changing the effect mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 48, in S460, the sub CPU 71 performs the time reduction counter update process. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the time reduction counter included in the received fluctuation pattern designation command to the value of the time reduction counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S461.

In S461, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the normal mode forced transition flag is "01H". When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the normal mode forced transition flag is "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S462. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the normal mode forced transition flag is not "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S465.

In S462, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the mode count counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S463.

In S463, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the normal mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S464.

In S464, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the normal mode forced transition flag. When this process is completed, the first effect mode change process routine is terminated.

In S465, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the mode transition hold flag is "01H". When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the mode transition hold flag is "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S466. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the mode transition hold flag is not "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S474.

In S466, the sub CPU 71 performs the effect mode promotion determination process. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to promote the effect mode based on the current effect mode. Hereinafter, the details of the processing will be described for each effect mode.

(In the case of the first time saving mode)
When the gaming state on the main side is the probabilistic gaming state, the sub CPU 71 determines that the mode shifts to the second time saving mode with a probability of "5/10", and determines that the game state shifts to the second time saving mode with a probability of "5/10". Is determined to be maintained. The sub CPU 71 determines that the game is in a probabilistic game state when the number of residual probability changes included in the received variation pattern specification command is 1 or more, and on the other hand, when the number of residual probability changes is 0, the sub CPU 71 determines that the game is in a probabilistic game state. , Judged as a non-probability changing game state.
Further, when the gaming state on the main side is the non-probability changing gaming state, the sub CPU 71 determines that the mode is shifted to the second time saving mode with a probability of "2/10", and has a probability of "8/10". It is determined that the one-time reduction mode is maintained.
In the present embodiment, the probability is shown as "x / y", but the probability is realized by performing a predetermined random number lottery.

The effect mode promotion determination process in the case of the first time saving mode is not limited to the above-mentioned process. For example, further, the probability such as the mode promotion probability may be defined as follows based on the number of remaining probability changes and / or the number of remaining time reductions on the main side. The mode promotion probability is the probability of promotion from the first time saving mode to the second time saving mode in the case of the first time saving mode, and the probability of promotion from the second time saving mode to the probability variation mode in the case of the second time saving mode. Means.
(Example 1)
When the number of residual probability changes is 31 or more, the sub CPU 71 determines that the mode is shifted (promoted) to the second time saving mode with a probability of "5/10" (maintained with a probability of "5/10"). When the number of residual probability changes is 1 or more and 30 or less, it is determined that the mode is shifted to the second time saving mode with a probability of "2/10" (maintained with a probability of "8/10").
(Example 2)
When the number of remaining time reductions is 31 or more, the sub CPU 71 determines that the mode is shifted to the second time reduction mode with a probability of "5/10" (maintained with a probability of "5/10"), and the number of remaining time reductions. When is 1 time or more and 30 times or less, it is determined that the mode is shifted to the second time saving mode with a probability of "2/10" (maintained with a probability of "8/10").
(Example 3)
When the total of the number of remaining probability changes and the number of remaining time reductions is 101 times or more, the sub CPU 71 determines that the mode is shifted to the second time reduction mode with a probability of "8/10" (probability of "2/10"). If the total of the number of remaining probability changes and the number of remaining time reductions is 51 times or more and 100 times or less, it is determined that the mode is shifted to the second time reduction mode with a probability of "5/10"("5/10"). If the total of the number of remaining probability changes and the number of remaining time reductions is 1 or more and 50 times or less, it is determined that the mode will be shifted to the second time reduction mode with a probability of "2/10"(" Maintained with a probability of "8/10").

(In the case of the second time saving mode)
When the game state on the main side is the probability change game state, the sub CPU 71 determines that the game shifts to the probability change mode with a probability of "2/10", and maintains the second time saving mode with a probability of "8/10". Then it is determined.
Further, the sub CPU 71 determines that the second time saving mode is maintained with a probability of "10/10" when the gaming state on the main side is the non-probability changing gaming state.
The effect mode promotion determination process in the case of the second time saving mode is not limited to the above-mentioned process. For example, the mode promotion probability may be further defined as described in (Example 1) or (Example 2) above based on the number of remaining probability changes and / or the number of remaining time reductions on the main side. In this case, the "second time saving mode" shown in each of (Example 1) and (Example 2) shall be read as "probability variation mode".

(In case of probability change mode)
The sub CPU 71 determines that the probability variation mode is maintained with a probability of "10/10".
The mode promotion probability is not limited to the above-mentioned value, and an appropriate value can be adopted.
When the processing of S466 is completed, the processing is transferred to S467. The effect mode promotion determination process may be performed at different timings to promote the effect mode.

In S467, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is determined that the effect mode is promoted by the process of S466. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the promotion is to be promoted, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S468. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the promotion is not performed, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S470.

In S468, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "03H" or "04H" to the value of the effect mode flag. More specifically, when the current effect mode is the first time saving mode, the sub CPU 71 sets "03H" corresponding to the second time saving mode of the migration destination to the value of the effect mode flag, and sets the current effect. When the mode is the second time saving mode, "04H" corresponding to the probabilistic mode of the transition destination is set to the value of the effect mode flag. In addition, the effect mode may be shifted from the first time saving mode to the probability variation mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S469.

In S469, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the time reduction counter to the value of the mode count counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S472. The value of the probability variation counter may be set to the value of the mode count counter. As an additional note, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes may be different values, so the number of time reductions is counted as a base. However, if the number of time reductions and the number of probability changes are the same, By simply setting the value corresponding to the number of probability changes, the number of time reductions can be managed.

In S470, the sub CPU 71 performs the addition number determination process. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S471. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of calculating a value obtained by adding a selected value to the number of time reductions on the main side. The selected values are "± 0" with a probability of "1/10", "-10" with a probability of "3/10", and "-20" and "3/10" with a probability of "3/10". It is "-30". If the value to be set in the mode count counter value becomes negative due to the calculation, the value may be set as it is in the time saving count on the main side, or a predetermined value ("" 10 ”etc.) may be set. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S471.

In S471, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the determined (calculated) value to the value of the mode count counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S472.

In S472, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data according to whether or not it is promoted or continued. For example, the sub CPU 71 sets the effect data for notifying "still", "+ X (value of the mode count counter)", and the like. In this embodiment, the same production data is set at the time of promotion and at the time of maintenance, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and different production data are set so that promotion or maintenance can be clearly understood. You may do it. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S473.

In S473, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the mode transition hold flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S474.

In S474, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the mode count counter is "0". In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode is the normal mode. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the mode count counter is "0", the sub CPU 71 ends the first effect mode change processing routine. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the mode count counter is not "0", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S475.

In S475, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the mode count counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S476.

In S476, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the mode count counter is "0". When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the mode count counter is "0", the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S477. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the mode count counter is not "0", the sub CPU 71 ends the first effect mode change processing routine.

In S477, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "2" or more. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is "2" or more, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S478. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the time reduction counter is not "2" or more, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S479. If the value of the time reduction counter is "1", the time reduction game state ends due to the special symbol change. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not the time reduction game state is also in the next special symbol change. The determination process is performed.

In S478, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the mode transition hold flag. By this process, the process related to the maintenance or promotion of the effect mode (S465 to S473, etc.) is performed in the next variation. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S480.

In S479, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the normal mode forced transition flag. By this process, the process related to the transition to the normal mode (S461 to S464, etc.) is performed in the next variation. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S480.

In S480, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data indicating the end of the effect mode. In the present embodiment, the effect based on the effect data is executed at the end of the special symbol change, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the effect is executed at different timings such as the beginning of the change. May be. When this process is completed, the first effect mode change process routine is terminated.

[Second production mode change process]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a second effect mode change process executed by the sub CPU 71. This second effect mode change process is a process for changing the effect mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 49, in S490, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the game state determination flag is “01H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a V prize has been won in "small hit 2". When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the game state determination flag is "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S491. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the game state determination flag is not "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S495.

In S491, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the received game state command is a command indicating a probabilistic game state and a time-saving game state. If it is determined that the game state command is a command indicating a probability change / time saving game state, the process is transferred to S492. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command is not a command indicating the probability change / time saving game state, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S493.

In S492, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "04H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the probabilistic mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S494.

In S493, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "02H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the first time saving mode. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S494.

In S494, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the number of time reductions of the received game state command to the value of the time reduction counter and the value of the mode number counter. When this process is completed, the second effect mode change process routine is terminated.

In S495, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the received game state command is a command indicating a time-saving game state. If it is determined that the game state command is a command indicating a time-saving game state, the second effect mode change processing routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the game state command is not a command indicating the time saving game state, the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S496.

In S496, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the mode count counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S497.

In S497, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the time reduction counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S498.

In S498, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the effect mode flag. When this process is completed, the second effect mode change process routine is terminated.
The present embodiment is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, when the value of the mode count counter is "0", the value of the time saving counter is "0", and the value of the effect mode flag is "01H", the processing of S495 to S498 may be omitted.

[Discharge error notification processing]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the discharge error notification process executed by the sub CPU 71. This discharge error notification process is a process for notifying a discharge error, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 50, in S500, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the discharge error notification timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 30 seconds. The number of seconds may be other than that, or the discharge error may be notified until the power is turned off without applying the discharge error notification timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S501.

In S501, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the discharge error notification flag is "00H". When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the discharge error notification flag is "00H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S502. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the discharge error notification flag is not "00H", the sub CPU 71 ends this discharge error notification processing routine.

In S502, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the discharge error notification flag to "01H". As a result, the discharge error is notified. When this processing is completed, the discharge error notification processing routine is terminated.

51 to 53 are diagrams showing an example of the effect screen and the effect screen flow. In the following, a case where the effect mode is changed to the normal mode, the first time-saving mode, the second time-saving mode, the first time-saving mode, the probability variation mode, and the first time-saving mode is taken as an example, and the characteristic effect of the present embodiment is given. Will be described. For convenience of explanation, the value of the time reduction counter and the value of the probability variation counter updated by the main CPU 61 are shown in the figure.

SC1 to SC59 are effect contents displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and on the screen, a decorative symbol display unit for displaying decorative symbols (left decorative symbol, middle decorative symbol, right decorative symbol), and a player. A mode display unit that can identify the effect mode, a time reduction number display unit that allows the player to recognize the time reduction number, an instruction display unit that displays instructions related to the launch of the game ball, etc. are appropriately displayed, and the contents are displayed according to various states. Is changed.
SC1 shows a mode in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the normal mode. In this example, since the lottery for the big hit of the first special symbol was won, the decorative symbols are stopped in sequence (SC2, SC3), and the fact that the big hit has been made is displayed on the screen (SC4), and the big hit of the first special symbol is displayed. (SC5 to SC7). In the production related to the jackpot, in order to support (promote) the V prize by the player, the launch timing of the game ball is notified on the instruction display unit (an example of notification "STOP" instructing not to launch, launching. An example of a notification instructing to do "right-handed" etc.) is given.
Then, after the end of the big hit, it is notified that the effect mode has been shifted to the first time saving mode (SC8). In this example, since the V prize is won during the big hit, 70 times are internally set in the value of the time reduction counter and the value of the probability variation counter, but 30 times are displayed on the screen (SC9). .. At this point, the player cannot grasp whether or not the player has won the V prize.
After that, as the game progresses, the number of time reductions on the time reduction display unit becomes 0 (SC9 to SC14), and it is notified that the first time reduction mode has ended (SC15). However, since the value of the time reduction counter is "41" internally, an effect of notifying that the first time reduction mode is continued is performed (SC16).

In addition, as the game progresses and the jackpot of "probability variation 5" is won in this example, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as "6 wins 6" (SC19), and then the "hit" is notified (SC20). Here, not only the "probability variation 5" but also the "small hit 1" can be the stop mode of "6 hits 6", so which hit is the "hit" (big hit or small hit). Since it cannot be determined, the player cannot recognize the type of hit from this effect.
Subsequently, the instruction display unit notifies the launch timing of the game ball (“STOP”, “right-handed”, etc.) (SC21, SC22), and in this example, the player causes the game ball to win a prize in the specific area 38. Therefore, "V" indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the specific area 38 is displayed on the screen (SC22). Since this "V" display is displayed in either "probability variation 5" or "small hit 1", the player cannot grasp the type of hit even by this effect.
After the jackpot ends, it is notified that the production mode has shifted to the second time saving mode (SC23).

In addition, as the game progresses and the jackpot of "probability change 5" is won in this example, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as "5 to 5" (SC25), and the instruction display unit notifies the game ball about the launch timing ("" "STOP", "right-handed", etc.) are performed (SC26, SC27), and in this example, since the player has won the game ball in the specific area 38, "V" is displayed on the screen (SC27). After the jackpot ends, it is notified that the production mode has continued the second time saving mode (SC28). In the present embodiment, since the V prize is won in "probability variation 5", 70 times are internally set to the value of the time reduction counter and the value of the probability variation counter. On the other hand, on the screen, when the same effect mode continues, the number of times is inherited and 60 times is displayed (SC29).

In addition, as the game progresses and in this example, a hit of "small hit 1" is won, so that the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as "4 wins 4" (SC30). At this point, since the game ball did not win in the specific area 38, it is notified that the effect mode has changed from the second time saving mode to the first time saving mode (SC31, SC32). In the present embodiment, since it is "small hit 1", the value of the time reduction number counter and the value of the probability variation number counter are internally the number of times before the small hit (11 times in this example).
In addition, as the game progresses (SCSC33 to SC38), in this example, the hit of "small hit 2" is won, so the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as "win" (SC39), and the hit of "small hit 2" is won. It is notified that this has been done (SC40). In the present embodiment, in the hit of "small hit 2", the effect related to the method of identifying whether or not the game is in the probabilistic game state is performed. In this example, the effect of "If you do not win a V, you can determine the game state!" Is displayed on the screen (SC41). That is, from the previous productions, the player cannot determine whether or not the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, but by performing the game according to this production, it is possible to identify whether or not the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state. become.
In this example, since the game ball did not win in the specific area 38, the effect of "entering the probability variation mode" is displayed on the screen (SC42). For the player, this effect makes it possible to grasp that the game is in a probabilistic game state.
In addition, the screen flow is shown when the game progresses, and in this example, the jackpot of "probability variation 4" is won, and then the jackpot of "probability variation 5" is won (SC43 to SC59).

FIG. 54 is a diagram (modification example) showing the opening / closing pattern of the winning opening and the interval time between rounds. The content shown in FIG. 12 is different from the content shown in FIG. 12 in that the hit pattern is mainly defined so that the first prize opening 36 and the second prize opening 37A open and close alternately.
More specifically, for example, in the "hit pattern 1", in the 2nd round, the first big winning opening 36 opens and closes in the manner of the opening / closing pattern A, and in the 3rd round, the second big winning opening 37A opens and closes. Opening and closing is performed in the mode of pattern I, and in the 4th round, the first winning opening 36 is opened and closed in the mode of opening and closing pattern A, and in the 5th round, the second winning opening 37A is opened and closed in the mode of opening and closing pattern I. Is done.

Next, another aspect (modification example) of the winning device mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 56.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), the first aspect of the winning device mechanism is the first winning opening first count switch 360A, the first winning opening second count switch 360B, the first winning opening shutter 361A, and the first. It is realized by including one large winning opening shutter 361B, a rolling region 372, a specific region 38A, a non-specific region 38B, discharge ports 38X, 38Y, and a displacement member 39.

When the first large winning opening shutter 361A and the first large winning opening shutter 361B are closed, the first large winning opening shutter 361A is in the upper stage, the rolling area 372 is in the middle stage, and the first large winning opening shutter 361B is in the lower stage. Each component is stepped. Therefore, when each shutter is closed, the game ball can roll in the order of the first winning opening shutter 361A, the rolling region 372, and the first winning opening shutter 361B.
Since the presence or absence of the second large winning opening shutter 371A is different from the winning device mechanism shown in FIG. 5, and the other configurations are the same, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the second aspect of the winning device mechanism is the first winning opening first count switch 360A, the first winning opening second count switch 360B, and the first winning opening third count switch. 360C, 1st prize opening shutter 361A, 1st prize opening shutter 361B, 1st prize opening shutter 361C, 2nd prize opening shutter 371A, rolling area 372, rolling area 373, specific area 38A, non-specific It is realized by including the region 38B, the discharge ports 38X, 38Y, and the displacement member 39.
The first large winning opening shutter 361A, the first large winning opening shutter 361B, and the first large winning opening shutter 361C are simultaneously opened and closed, and the first large winning opening 36A, the first large winning opening 36B, and the first large winning opening 36B are controlled. The first prize opening 36C is simultaneously opened and closed.

In this winning device mechanism, the first large winning opening shutter 361A is provided at the upper right corner, and below the first large winning opening shutter 361A (directly below in this example), the first large winning opening first count switch is provided. 360A is provided.
On the other hand, a rolling region 372 is provided in the lower left of the first large winning opening shutter 361A, and a first large winning opening shutter 361B is provided in the lower left of the rolling region 372. A second count switch 360B of the first large winning opening is provided below the shutter 361B of the first large winning opening (directly below in this example).
Further, a rolling region 373 is provided in the lower left of the first large winning opening shutter 361B, and a first large winning opening shutter 361C is provided in the lower left of the rolling region 373. Further, below the first large winning opening shutter 361C (directly below in this example), the first large winning opening third count switch 360C, the displacement member 39, the specific area 38A, and the discharge port 38X are sequentially provided. ..
Further, in the prize-winning device mechanism, a non-specific area 38B and a discharge port 38Y are sequentially provided at the lowermost part.
Next, looking at the positional relationship through which the game ball can pass through each of the major winning openings, the position where the game ball can pass through the first major winning opening 1st count switch 360A (1st major winning opening 36A), the 1st major winning opening No. 1 The two count switches 360B (first special winning opening 36B) are provided lower in this order, and the first special winning opening third count switch 360C (first special winning opening 36C) is provided lower in this order.

When the 1st prize opening shutter 361A, the 1st prize opening shutter 361B, and the 1st prize opening shutter 361C are closed, the 1st prize opening shutter 361A is the 1st stage and the rolling area 372 is the 2nd stage. , The first large winning opening shutter 361B is the third stage, the rolling region 373 is the fourth stage, the first large winning opening shutter 361C is the fifth stage, and each component is stepped. Therefore, when each shutter is closed, the game ball rolls in the order of the first winning opening shutter 361A, the rolling area 372, the first winning opening shutter 361B, the rolling area 373, and the first winning opening shutter 361C. It is movable. The game ball that has passed over the first winning opening shutter 361C passes through the second winning opening 37A when the second winning opening shutter 371A is open, and is guided to the back side of the main winning device mechanism. ..

Next, when the game ball reaches each of the first prize opening shutter 361A, the first prize opening shutter 361B, and the first prize opening shutter 361C, the flow of the game ball when each shutter is open. Will be described.
Here, each shutter (first prize opening shutter 361A to first prize opening shutter 361C and second prize opening shutter 371A) opens and closes (drives) according to the pattern shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. Will be At this time, the first large winning opening shutter 361A to the first large winning opening shutter 361C simultaneously open and close (drive) when opening and closing the first large winning opening 36A to the first large winning opening 36C, and the second large winning opening shutter 361A to the first large winning opening 36C. The winning opening shutter 371A performs an opening / closing operation when opening / closing the second large winning opening 37A.
(The first prize opening shutter 361A is open)
After passing through the first large winning opening first count switch 360A, the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B and the discharge port 38Y provided further below. The game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening first count switch 360A does not pass through the specific area 38A.
(The first prize opening shutter 361B is open)
After passing through the first large winning opening second count switch 360B, the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B and the discharge port 38Y provided further below. The game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening second count switch 360B does not pass through the specific area 38A.
(The first prize opening shutter 361C is open)
The game ball passes through the first large winning opening third count switch 360C (first large winning opening 36C) and reaches the displacement member 39. At this time, when the displacement member 39 is open, the game ball passes through the specific area 38A and the discharge port 38X. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is closed, the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B provided below and the discharge port 38Y without passing through the specific area 38A.
The winning device mechanism is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, the number of shutters for the first prize opening may be four or more instead of three. Further, for example, it is not necessary to provide the shutter of the second big winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 55 (c), the third aspect of the winning device mechanism is realized by including the same components as the second aspect.

In this winning device mechanism, the first large winning opening shutter 361A is provided at the upper right corner, and below the first large winning opening shutter 361A (directly below in this example), the first large winning opening first count switch is provided. 360A is provided.
On the other hand, a rolling region 372 is provided in the lower left of the first large winning opening shutter 361A, and a first large winning opening shutter 361B is provided in the lower left of the rolling region 372. A second count switch 360B of the first large winning opening is provided below the shutter 361B of the first large winning opening (directly below in this example).
Further, a rolling region 373 is provided in the lower left of the first large winning opening shutter 361B, and a first large winning opening shutter 361C is provided in the lower left of the rolling region 373. Further, below the first large winning opening shutter 361C (directly below in this example), the first large winning opening third count switch 360C is provided.
Further, in the winning device mechanism, the displacement member 39, the specific area 38A, and the discharge port 38X are sequentially provided on the left side, and the non-specific area 38B and the discharge port 38Y are sequentially provided on the right side at the lowermost part. Has been done.

Next, when the game ball reaches each of the first prize opening shutter 361A, the first prize opening shutter 361B, and the first prize opening shutter 361C, the flow of the game ball when each shutter is open. Since the same applies to all of the above, a state in which the first large winning opening shutter 361A is open will be described as an example. The opening / closing operation (driving) of each shutter (first prize opening shutter 361A to first prize opening shutter 361C and second prize opening shutter 371A) is the same as in FIG. 55 (b). The explanation is omitted.
The game ball can reach the displacement member 39 after passing through the first large winning opening first count switch 360A. When the displacement member 39 is reached and the displacement member 39 is open, the game ball passes through the specific area 38A and the discharge port 38X. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is not reached, or when the displacement member 39 is reached but the displacement member 39 is closed, the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A, but does not pass through the specific area 38A, and the non-specific area 38B and the discharge port 38Y. Will pass through.
Here, in a state where the specific area 38A is open (displacement member 39 is open), the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 38A (passability) is the first count of the first large winning opening. The switch 360A, the first large winning opening second count switch 360B, and the first large winning opening third count switch 360C are configured to increase in this order. On the other hand, in the state where the specific area 38A is open, the possibility that the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B is as follows: The first grand prize opening and the third count switch 360C are configured to be lower in this order.
The winning device mechanism is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, the number of shutters for the first prize opening may be four or more instead of three. Further, for example, it is not necessary to provide the shutter of the second big winning opening.

FIGS. 56A to 56C show a fourth aspect of the winning device mechanism. FIG. 56A is a front view of the winning device mechanism in a state where the second special winning opening shutter 371A and the second large winning opening shutter 371B are closed (when closed), and FIG. 56B is a front view of the winning device mechanism. It is a front view of the winning device mechanism in the state where the shutter 371A and the second big winning opening shutter 371B are open (when it is open), and (c) is for showing that there is one 2nd big winning opening 37A. It is a front view of the winning device mechanism when the partition plate 371X is removed. As shown in FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c), the partition plate 371X is provided in front of the second large winning opening 37, and the internal space communicates with each other.
As shown in FIGS. 56 (a) to 56 (c), the fourth aspect of the winning device mechanism is the first large winning opening first count switch 360A, the first large winning opening second count switch 360B, and the first large winning opening. 3rd count switch 360C, 1st big winning opening shutter 361A, 1st big winning opening shutter 361B, 1st big winning opening shutter 361C, 2nd big winning opening shutter 371A, 2nd big winning opening shutter 371B, partition plate 371X, It is realized by including a rolling region 372, a rolling region 373, a specific region 38A, a non-specific region 38B, discharge ports 38X, 38Y, and a displacement member 39.
As described above, since the second major winning opening 37 communicates internally, even if only one second major winning opening count switch (not shown) is provided, the second major winning opening 37 is won. Can be detected. However, a second large winning opening count switch (not shown) is provided corresponding to each of the second large winning opening shutter 371A and the second large winning opening shutter 371B, and the game ball corresponds to any of the shutters. It is also possible to identify whether or not the winning opening 37 (the second major winning opening 37A, the second major winning opening 37B) has won a prize.

The arrangement of the components in the winning device mechanism is the same as that of the second aspect shown in FIG. 55 (b) except for the second winning opening shutter 371A and the second winning opening shutter 371B, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. To do. Further, regarding the flow of the game ball when each shutter is opened when the game ball reaches each of the first large winning opening shutter 361A, the first large winning opening shutter 361B, and the first large winning opening shutter 361C. Is the same as the second aspect, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. If each shutter is open when the game ball reaches each of the second big winning opening shutter 371A and the second big winning opening shutter 371B, the game ball has the second big winning prize corresponding to each shutter. It passes through the opening 37A or the second large winning opening 37B, is guided to the back side of the main winning device mechanism, and does not pass through the specific area 38A or the non-specific area 38B.
Each shutter of the winning device mechanism (first winning opening shutter 361A to first winning opening shutter 361C, second winning opening shutter 371A, and second winning opening shutter 371B) is shown in FIG. 12 or FIG. 54. The opening / closing operation (driving) is performed according to the pattern. At this time, the first large winning opening shutter 361A to the first large winning opening shutter 361C simultaneously open and close (drive) when opening and closing the first large winning opening 36A to the first large winning opening 36C, and the second large winning opening shutter 361A to the first large winning opening 36C. The winning opening shutter 371A and the second large winning opening shutter 371B perform opening and closing operations at the same time when opening and closing the second large winning opening 37A and the second large winning opening 37B.

Next, looking at the positional relationship through which the game ball can pass through each of the major winning openings, the position where the game ball can pass through the first major winning opening 1st count switch 360A (1st major winning opening 36A) and the 2nd major winning opening 1st 1 Count switch 370A (1st big winning opening 37A), 1st big winning opening 2nd count switch 360B (1st big winning opening 36B), 2nd big winning opening 2nd count The switches are provided lower in the order of the position where the switch 370B (first prize opening 37B) can be passed and the position where the first big prize opening third count switch 360C (first prize opening 36C) can be passed.
In addition, the position (area) where the game ball can pass through the first prize opening 36A realizes the first passing area, and the position where the game ball can pass through the first winning opening 36B realizes the second passing area. Then, the position where the second large winning opening 37A can be passed realizes the third passing area, and the position where the second large winning opening 37B can be passed realizes the fourth passing area and passes through the first large winning opening 36C. Possible positions realize the fifth passage area. Further, the first large winning opening shutter 361A realizes the first displacement member, the first large winning opening shutter 361B realizes the second displacement member, and the second large winning opening shutter 371A realizes the third displacement member. The second prize opening shutter 371B realizes the fourth displacement member, and the first prize opening shutter 361C realizes the fifth displacement member.
Further, the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described configuration. For example, in one round game, a plurality of shutters are configured to be movable in order to open and close a plurality of passing regions, but even if one shutter is configured to open and close a plurality of passing regions. Good.

<Effects obtained by the above configuration>
According to the above-described configuration, for example, a jackpot game state of "time reduction 1" in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A, and a jackpot game of "probability 2" in which the game ball easily passes through the specific area 38A. A state is provided, and the open state time of the second variable winning device in one or more rounds (for example, the 1st round) of these jackpot gaming states can both be the first time (for example, 5.1 s) (FIG. 8 to 12, FIG. 14, etc.). In this way, in the big hit game state of "time saving 1" where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A, it is not more disadvantageous than the big hit game state of "probability 2" where the game ball can easily pass through the specific area 38A. By providing points, it is possible to eliminate the situation where the degree of advantage is significantly lowered, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, a jackpot game state of "time reduction 2" in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A, and a jackpot game of "probability change 1" in which the game ball easily passes through the specific area 38A. A state is provided. The time in the open state of the second variable winning device in one or more rounds (for example, the 1st round) of the jackpot game state of "time reduction 2" is the first hour (7.1 s), and the jackpot game of "probability change 1". The open state time of the second variable winning device in the state is the third time (3.1 s) shorter than the first time (FIGS. 8 to 13 and the like). In this way, in the big hit game state of "time reduction 2" in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A, it is more advantageous than the big hit game state of "probability change 1" in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area 38A. By providing points, it is possible to eliminate the situation where the degree of advantage is significantly lowered, so that it is possible to improve the interest.

In the above-described configuration, for example, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A in the small hit game state of "small hit 2", notification of whether or not the game ball is controlled to the probabilistic game state (for example, "V must be won" The production of "The game state can be determined!") Is performed (Fig. 53, etc.). Therefore, the player can grasp whether or not the game is in the probabilistic game state by not passing the game ball through the specific area 38A in the small hit game state of "small hit 2".

In the above-described configuration, for example, when the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A in the small hit game state of "small hit 1", the notification is performed when the game ball is controlled or not controlled in the probability variation game state. (For example, the production of "V") is performed (FIG. 52, etc.). According to this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the player is in the probabilistic gaming state.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, the probability variation mode ends when the probability variation game state ends, but when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A during the jackpot game state of "probability variation 5", the predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) is performed again. ) Probability change game state becomes possible (Fig. 16 etc.). Therefore, if the passing of the game ball to the specific area 38A in the jackpot game state of "Probability 5" is repeated, the probability change game state does not end, so that the probability change mode does not end.
On the other hand, even if the game ball passes through the specific area 38A during the small hit game state of "small hit 1", the probability variation game state of a predetermined number of times is not possible again. Therefore, if the game ball repeatedly passes through the specific area 38A during the small hit game state of "small hit 1", the probability change game state ends and the probability change mode ends.
However, in the big hit game state of "probability change 5" and the small hit game state of "small hit 1", even if the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the probability change mode continues, so that which game state is apparently I don't know if was established.
Therefore, even if it can be recognized that it is the first production mode by checking the production, the probabilistic mode may suddenly end or the probabilistic mode may continue for a period far exceeding the expectation. Since the probabilistic gaming state suddenly ends or continues for a period far beyond expectations, it can be difficult to recognize how long the probabilistic gaming state will continue, and it is a hobby for the probabilistic gaming state. It can be improved.
Further, in the small hit game state of "small hit 1", the probability variation game state does not end due to the fact that the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A, but the small hit game state of "small hit 1" is in progress. In addition, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A, the probability change mode ends as well as the end of the probability change game state. This makes it even more difficult to recognize from the effect mode that the game is in a probabilistic game state.

In the above-described configuration, for example, in the big hit gaming state of "probability variation 5" and the small hit gaming state of "small hit 1", the notification ("probability variation 5" and "probability variation 5") is performed when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A. The "V" effect performed when a V prize is won is the same for any of the small hits 1 ", and the second variable winning device (for example, the first large winning opening shutter 361A, the first large winning opening shutter) is the same. The displacement mode of 361B) is the same or substantially the same (FIGS. 8 to 12, FIG. 15, FIG. 52, etc.). In this way, by making it more difficult to recognize the big hit game state of "probability change 5" and the small hit game state of "small hit 1", it is possible to make it more difficult to recognize how long the probability change game state will continue. It is possible to further improve the interest in the probabilistic gaming state.

In the above-described configuration, for example, in the small hit game state of "small hit 1", the probability variation game state does not end due to the fact that the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A, but the game ball is in the specific area 38A. If does not pass, it is notified that the first time saving mode is set even after the end of the big hit gaming state of "probability change 5" and the end of the small hit gaming state of "small hit 1" (for example, "first time saving". Since the effect of "mode entry" is performed), it is possible to make it appear as if the probabilistic game state has ended (FIGS. 16, 52, etc.).

According to the above-described configuration, for example, in the small hit game state of "small hit 2", by not passing the game ball through the specific area 38A, it is notified whether or not the game is in the probabilistic game state, which is a novelty that has never been seen before. (Fig. 16, FIG. 53, etc.).

According to the above configuration, for example, in the big hit game state, after controlling the first big winning opening shutter 361A and the first big winning opening shutter 361B to the first position, the second big winning opening shutter 371A is moved to the first position. After controlling, it is possible to control the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first special winning opening shutter 361B to the first position (FIG. 54, etc.). Further, the game ball passes through a position where it can pass through the first large winning opening 36A, then passes through a position where it can pass through the second large winning opening 37A, and then passes through a position where it can pass through the first large winning opening 36B. It is possible. According to such a configuration, when the first large winning opening shutter 361A is in the first position, the game ball that has not passed through the first large winning opening 36A is prevented from being dropped by the second large winning opening 37A. Further, when the second big winning opening shutter 371A is in the first position, the game ball that did not pass through the second big winning opening 37A can be prevented from being dropped by the first big winning opening 36B. it can. In this way, in the big hit game state, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the player loses the game ball, which is disadvantageous to the player, and thus it is possible to improve the interest.

"Missing" means that in the big hit game state, the game ball launched aiming at winning the big winning opening does not win any of the big winning openings.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, a jackpot game state of "time reduction 2" in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A, and a jackpot game of "probability change 1" in which the game ball easily passes through the specific area 38A. A state is provided, and in the big hit game state of "time reduction 2", the time that can pass through the passing area is the first hour (for example, 7.1 s), and in the big hit game state of "probability variation 1", the passing area can be passed. The time is the third hour (for example, 3.1 s) equal to or less than the first hour (FIGS. 8 to 13 and the like). In this way, in the big hit game state of "time saving 2" in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A, it is possible to pass through the passing area more than in the second big hit game state in which the game ball can easily pass through the specific area 38A. It is possible to further improve the interest by setting the configuration so that the time is not shortened and providing a point that is not disadvantageous in the jackpot game state of "time reduction 2" as compared with the jackpot game state of "probability change 1".

According to the above-described configuration, for example, in the big hit game state, the control to set the first big winning opening shutter 361A, the first big winning opening shutter 361B, and the first big winning opening shutter 361C to the first position and the second big winning opening shutter 361C. It is possible to alternately control the winning opening shutter 371A and the second large winning opening shutter 371B to be in the first position (FIG. 56, etc.). In this way, in the big hit game state, by preventing the game balls that did not pass through the big winning opening when the shutters of each other are in the first position, the game balls are not dropped, which is a problem for the player. Since the situation where profits are generated can be further reduced, it is possible to further improve the interest.

According to the above configuration, for example, in the big hit game state, the first big winning opening shutter 361A and the first big winning opening shutter 361B and the second big winning opening shutter 371A and the second big winning opening shutter 371B open and close alternately. It is possible (Fig. 56, etc.). Further, for example, in the big hit game state, the first big winning opening shutter 361A, the first big winning opening shutter 361B, the first big winning opening shutter 361C, the second big winning opening shutter 371A, and the second big winning opening shutter 371B. Can open and close alternately. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game balls that did not pass through the passing area from being dropped when the shutters of each other are in the first position, so that the interest of the big hit game state can be improved. Can be done.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 80. In the second embodiment, the same or similar components as those shown in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

[Prize winning device mechanism]
The winning device mechanism of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57.
FIG. 57A is a front view of the winning device mechanism in a state where the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first large winning opening shutter 361B are closed (when closed), and FIG. 57B is a front view of the winning device mechanism. It is a front view of the winning device mechanism in the state (when opened) that the shutter 361A and the first big winning opening shutter 361B are open.

As shown in FIG. 57 (a), the main winning device mechanism includes a first large winning opening first count switch 360A, a first large winning opening second count switch 360B, a first large winning opening shutter 361A, and a first large winning opening. It is realized by including the mouth shutter 361B, the rolling region 372, the specific region 38A, the non-specific region 38B, the discharge ports 38X, 38Y, and the displacement member 39. In this pachinko gaming machine, the game ball launched by "right-handed" basically flows down the right side of the stage 31 and reaches the first big winning opening shutter 361A, and the first big winning opening shutter 361A. When the first special winning opening shutter 361B is closed, the first special winning opening shutter 361A, the rolling region 372, and the first large winning opening shutter 361B are sequentially rolled. Further, in the present embodiment, if "right-handed" is performed while the first large winning opening shutter 361A and the first large winning opening shutter 361B are open, it is detected by the first large winning opening second count switch 360B. It will be detected by the first count switch 360A of the first winning opening without any trouble. Therefore, even if "right-handed" is performed while the first prize opening shutter 361A and the first prize opening shutter 361B are open, the game ball is configured not to pass through the specific area 38A.

In the present winning device mechanism, the first large winning opening shutter 361A for opening and closing the first large winning opening 36A is provided at the upper right corner. Further, below the first large winning opening shutter 361A (directly below in this example), the first large winning opening first count switch 360A is provided.
A rolling region 372 is provided in the lower left of the first large winning opening shutter 361A, and a first large winning opening shutter 361B is provided in the lower left of the rolling region 372. Further, below the first large winning opening shutter 361B (directly below in this example), the first large winning opening second count switch 360B, the displacement member 39, the specific area 38A, and the discharge port 38X are sequentially provided. ..
In the prize-winning device mechanism, a non-specific area 38B and a discharge port 38Y are sequentially provided at the lowermost part.

When the first large winning opening shutter 361A and the first large winning opening shutter 361B are closed, the first large winning opening shutter 361A is in the upper stage, the rolling area 372 is in the middle stage, and the first large winning opening shutter 361B is in the lower stage. Each component is stepped. Therefore, when each shutter is closed, the game ball can roll in the order of the first winning opening shutter 361A, the rolling region 372, and the first winning opening shutter 361B.

Next, the flow of the game ball when each shutter is open when the game ball reaches each of the first special winning opening shutter 361A and the first large winning opening shutter 361B will be described.

(The first prize opening shutter 361A is open)
As shown in FIG. 57 (b), the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B and the discharge port 38Y provided further below after passing through the first grand prize opening first count switch 360A. Become. The game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening first count switch 360A does not pass through the specific area 38A.

(The first prize opening shutter 361B is open)
The game ball passes through the first large winning opening second count switch 360B and reaches the displacement member 39. At this time, when the displacement member 39 is open, the game ball passes through the specific area 38A and the discharge port 38X. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is closed, the game ball passes through the non-specific area 38B provided below and the discharge port 38Y without passing through the specific area 38A.

[Game machine specifications]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, specifications relating to the gaming characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the present embodiment, the hit probability (big hit probability) of the special symbol including the small hit probability described later is 1/80 (25/2000) in the low probability time (non-probability variation game state). ), It is 1 / 76.9 (26/2000) at the time of high probability (probability change game state). The small hit probability of being in the small hit game state is 0 in the first special symbol and 1/100 (20/2000) in the second special symbol. It should be noted that the probabilities at the low probability and the high probability in the jackpot probability are not limited to those described above. It is possible to appropriately adopt the probability that it is easier to win when the probability is high than when the probability is low. In addition, the small hit may not be won.
As for the digestion order of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the lottery by the second special symbol is prioritized for digestion. The order of digestion may be the order of winning, or the first special symbol may be the priority digestion.
As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation game state), the ST game state in which the probability variation game state continues up to 30 times as the number of games (the number of changes of the special symbol) is implemented. The number of STs is not limited to the above. In addition, the probabilistic game state may continue until the next big hit.

The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the big hit symbol "probability change 1" of the first special symbol, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) becomes "hit pattern 1", 5R is given as the number of rounds of the round game, and the bonus content is "probability change big hit". It is "1". The probability (selectivity) of "probability variation 1" as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is set to 40/100.

In the jackpot symbol "probability variation 2" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is "probability variation 1", and the bonus content is "probability variation jackpot 2". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 2" of the first special symbol is set to 40/100.

In the jackpot symbol "probability variation 3" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is "probability variation 1", and the bonus content is "probability variation jackpot 3". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 3" of the first special symbol is set to 10/100.

In the jackpot symbol "probability variation 4" of the first special symbol, the hit pattern is "probability variation 1", and the bonus content is "probability variation jackpot 4". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 4" of the first special symbol is set to 10/100.

In the jackpot symbol "probability change 5" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is "hit pattern 2", 8R is given as the number of rounds of the round game, and the bonus content is "probability variation jackpot 5". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 5" of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

In the big hit symbol "probability change 6" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is "hit pattern 2", and the bonus content is "probability change big hit 6". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 6" of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

In the big hit symbol "probability change 7" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is "hit pattern 2", and the bonus content is "probability change big hit 7". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 7" of the second special symbol is set to 70/100.

In the jackpot symbol "probability variation 8" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is "hit pattern 2", and the bonus content is "probability variation jackpot 8". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 8" of the second special symbol is set to 5/100.

In the big hit symbol "probability change 9" of the second special symbol, the hit pattern is "hit pattern 2", and the bonus content is "probability change big hit 9". The selection rate of the jackpot symbol "probability variation 9" of the second special symbol is set to 5/100.
In the small hit symbol "small hit 1", the hit pattern is "hit pattern 3", and the bonus content is "special symbol 2 hit". The selection rate of the small hit symbol "small hit 1" is set to 100/100.
In the small hit game state, unlike the big hit game state, there is no concept of a round game, so the number of rounds is not specified.

Further, the number of rounds is not limited to 5R and 8R, and a jackpot of another number of rounds may be provided. Further, the types of jackpots are not limited to those described above. The types of jackpots of the first special symbol may be increased, or the types of jackpots of the second special symbol may be increased.

The number of large winning openings is set to count up to 10 as the maximum number of winnings per round. The number of counts (specified number / maximum number of prizes) of the large prize openings is set to "10", but the number is not limited to this. The hit probability of a normal symbol is set to be 0/257 when the probability is low and 257/257 when the probability is high. The probabilities at low probability and high probability are not limited to those described above. It is possible to appropriately adopt the probability that the high probability is easier to win than the low probability. In addition, you may win the prize when the probability is low.

[1 round opening / closing pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening in one round will be described.

As shown in FIG. 59, a plurality of opening / closing patterns A to C are defined as a one-round opening / closing pattern (one-round opening / closing pattern) for the first large winning opening 36.
The opening / closing patterns A and B are opening / closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening / closing pattern C is an opening / closing pattern corresponding to the small hit gaming state. The opening / closing pattern C in the small hit game state is not defined as one round, but is shown together with other opening / closing patterns A and B for convenience. The first large winning opening 36A is appropriately referred to as a large winning opening. The opening / closing patterns A to C shown in FIG. 59 are merely examples, and the specific time for defining the opening / closing pattern may be other than those shown in the figure. Further, the opening pattern of the large winning opening is not limited to the above three types. Two or less types may be provided, or four or more types may be provided. However, when four or more types of opening / closing patterns for the large winning openings are provided, it is preferable to provide a number of hits corresponding to the provided number.

The opening / closing pattern A is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state is initially 14 s, the closed state is 4 s, and then the open state continues for 14 s again. The opening / closing pattern A is defined as a round section from the first opening state to the final closing state. Similarly, in the other opening / closing patterns B and C, the round section is defined as the period from the first opening state to the final closing state.
In the section where the open state is 14 s, the open state of the big winning opening is relatively long, which is a long opening. That is, in the opening / closing pattern A, after the long opening occurs once, the long opening occurs once again after the closed state, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern A is 28 s.
For convenience of explanation, a section in which the open state is 0.1 s or less is referred to as short open, a section in which the open state is longer than 0.1 s and less than 14 s is referred to as middle open, and a section in which the open state is 14 s or more is referred to as long open.
In the open state where the short is open, it is extremely difficult to win the game ball to the large winning opening, and in the open state where the middle is open, it is easier to win the game ball to the large winning opening than when the short is opened. In the open state, which is a long opening, it is easier to win a game ball in the big winning opening than in the middle opening.
Further, the number of times and the time of the opening state of the first large winning opening 36 in the opening / closing pattern A are not limited to those described above. For example, one open state is not limited to 14s, and may be less than 14s or more than 14s, and a predetermined number of winning times can be appropriately adopted. Further, the number of times in the open state is not limited to two times, and may be one or three times or more.
In addition, the long opening (second half part) in which V prizes can be won may be divided into a plurality of times. In other words, in the latter half part, one or more first prize-winning openings may be closed (closed time). For example, the long open state (opening time 14s) may be set to an open state (opening time 5s), a closed state (closing time 1s), and an open state (opening time 9s). According to this configuration, it becomes possible (easy) for the game ball to reach the rolling region 372 (in other words, the game ball is the first) during the closing time of the newly provided first large winning opening 36A. The chances of passing through the big winning opening 36B will increase), and it will be easier to win a V prize in the second half part.

The opening / closing pattern B is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state continues only once for 14 seconds. That is, in the opening / closing pattern B, the long opening occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern B is 14 s.
The number of times and the time of the opening state of the first large winning opening 36 in the opening / closing pattern B are not limited to those described above. For example, one open state is not limited to 14s, and may be less than 14s or more than 14s, and a predetermined number of winning times can be appropriately adopted. Further, the number of times in the open state is not limited to one, and may be a plurality of times.
Further, the opening / closing pattern A and the opening / closing pattern B may be in the open state for the same time, or the opening / closing pattern B may be in the open state for a longer time than the opening / closing pattern A.

The opening / closing pattern C is an opening / closing pattern in which the open state continues only once for 1 s. That is, in the opening / closing pattern C, the middle opening occurs once, and the total opening time of the opening / closing pattern C is 1 s.
The number of times and the time of the opening state of the first large winning opening 36 in the opening / closing pattern C are not limited to those described above. For example, one open state is not limited to 1s, and may be less than 1s or more than 1s, and a predetermined number of winning times can be appropriately adopted. Further, the number of times in the open state is not limited to one, and may be a plurality of times.
The opening pattern is not limited to the above three patterns. Two or less types may be provided, or four or more types may be provided. However, when four or more types of opening / closing patterns for the large winning openings are provided, it is preferable to provide a number of hits corresponding to the provided number.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 that opens and closes the specific region 38A will be described with reference to FIG. 60.

The displacement member 39 basically operates in conjunction with the open / closed state of the first big winning opening 36 regardless of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state. As shown in FIG. 60, as for the operation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member operation pattern), as a general rule, the specific area 38A is closed after the operation period for opening the specific area 38A is initially 0.1 s. It is defined as an operation pattern in which the non-operation period is 18 s, and the operation period in which the open state is subsequently maintained continues for 15 s. The total operating time of the displacement member operating pattern is 15.1 s.
During the operation period of 0.1 s, the open state of the specific region 38A becomes relatively short, so that it becomes extremely difficult to win a V prize in the specific region 38A. On the other hand, during the operation period of 15 s at the longest, the open state of the specific region 38A is relatively long, so that it is relatively easy to win a V prize in the specific region 38A.
Regarding the operation period of 15s, in one round in which the first large winning opening 36 is opened and closed, for example, when the number of large winning opening counts reaches the upper limit winning number, the first large winning opening 36 is closed. When the predetermined monitoring processing time for the residual sphere, which will be described later, has passed, the displacement member 39 may become inactive and the specific region 38A may be closed even before the predetermined 15s have elapsed.

[Large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit game state and the small hit game state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 61, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 3 are defined as the large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). The "hit pattern 1" is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the bonuses "probability variation jackpot 1" to "probability variation jackpot 4" and the specified number of rounds is defined as 5R.
In addition, the interval between rounds is a section in which the big winning opening is closed after the last big winning opening is closed in one round until the big winning opening is first opened in the next round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as the pattern of the interval between rounds, the interval pattern a in which the closed state (closing time) is 1.3 s is defined.
In the "hit pattern 1", the interval between all rounds is the interval pattern a, the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern A in the 1st round, and the first big winning opening 36 in all the 2nd to 5th rounds. Is specified to be the opening / closing pattern B. That is, the "hit pattern 1" is executed as a round in which a V prize can be won in the specific area 38A in the 1st round.

The "hit pattern 2" is a hit pattern that occurs at the time of the bonuses "probability variation jackpot 5" to "probability variation jackpot 9" and the specified number of rounds is defined as 8R. In the "hit pattern 2", the interval between all rounds is the interval pattern a, and the first big winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern B in each of the 1st to 7th rounds, and the first big winning opening 36 in the 8th round. Is specified to be the opening / closing pattern A. That is, the "hit pattern 2" is executed as a round in which a V prize can be won in the specific area 38A at the 8th round.

The "hit pattern 3" is generated at the time of the bonus "small hit 1", and it is stipulated that the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening / closing pattern C only once. That is, in the "hit pattern 3", there is a possibility that the game ball wins the first large winning opening 36, and there is a possibility that the specific area 38A is V-winned, but there is a V-winning to the specific area 38A. Even if it is executed, it is executed as if it cannot shift to the probabilistic game state.

In each hit pattern, an opening / closing pattern is associated with each round in advance, but an opening / closing pattern other than the above may be associated. For example, the 1st R pattern in the "hit pattern 1" may be the opening / closing pattern B instead of the opening / closing pattern A.
Further, the interval pattern may be two or more types. Further, the time of the interval pattern a may be a time other than the above.
Also, the same round may be used for all jackpots. In this case, for example, it is conceivable that all jackpots are set to 8R, 6R to 8R are set to open / close pattern B for "hit pattern 1", and 2R to 8R are set to open / close pattern B for "hit pattern 3". Since the "hit pattern 2" is 8R, the opening / closing pattern as shown in FIG. 61 can be adopted.

[Table for determining game status]
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a game state determination table. The game state determination table is a table referred to in the processing of S1096 and the processing of S1100 of the main CPU 61, which will be described later. In the game state determination table, the number of time reductions after the end of the big hit is defined according to the big hit symbol and the game state before the transition to the big hit.
For example, at the end of the jackpot of the jackpot symbol "Probability Change 1", if the game state before the transition of the jackpot is a non-probability change / non-time saving game state and a V prize is won during the jackpot, the number of time saving is 0 times. If it is decided and V is not won during the big hit, 30 times are decided as the number of time reductions (first record).
Further, for example, at the end of the jackpot of the jackpot symbol "probability change 1", when the game state before the transition of the jackpot is a non-probability change / time saving game state, if a V prize is won during the jackpot, the number of time saving is 50 times. Is decided, and if V is not won during the big hit, 30 times are decided as the number of time reductions (second record).

In the game state determination table, four types of time saving times of "0", "30", "50", and "100" are specified, but the number of times is not limited to this, and other values are specified. You may.
Regardless of whether or not you have won a V prize, you may specify the value so that all or part of the jackpots will always be given the number of time reductions, and all or part of the jackpots will not always be given the number of time reductions. A value may be specified.
There are big hits that are given the number of time reductions regardless of whether or not they have won the V prize, but in all the big hits, the number of time reductions is given in either the case where the V prize is won or not, and the number of time reductions is given in the other. The value may be specified so that it is not given.

[Game state and production mode of the game machine]
Next, the gaming state and the effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. The gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

As shown in FIG. 63, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a normal mode, a special mode, a first special mode, a second special mode, and a third special mode as effect modes in the normal gaming state. There is.
The normal mode is a production mode of a non-probability changing game state or a probable change game state and a non-time saving game state. In the normal mode, an impression different from that of the first special mode to the third special mode and the special mode is performed.

In the normal mode, a big hit is made based on the first special symbol, and after the big hit is completed, the effect mode is changed from the normal mode to one of the special mode, the first special mode, and the second special mode.
More specifically, if the number of time reductions is not given in the big hit, the mode is shifted to the special mode. In addition, when the number of time reductions given in the big hit is 30 or 50 times, the mode shifts to the first special mode, and when the number of time reductions given in the big hit is 100 times, the probability is 9/10. Moves to the first special mode (* Condition 1). On the other hand, if the number of time reductions given in the big hit is 100 times, there is a 1/10 chance of shifting to the second special mode (* condition 2).
The transition rate of the effect mode is not limited to the above-mentioned value. For example, when the number of time reductions given in the big hit is 100 times, the shift ratio may be set so as to always (force) shift to the second special mode.

In the normal mode, the jackpot is based on the second special symbol, and after the jackpot is completed, the normal mode may be switched to another production mode, the details of which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the big hit based on the second special symbol in the normal mode is when the player wins the lottery by the reserved ball of the special symbol game related to the second special symbol (in the big hit lottery related to the second special symbol). If you win).

The special mode is a production mode of a non-probable variable game state or a probable variable game state and a non-time saving game state. Similar to the normal mode, the special mode produces an impression different from that of other production modes.
In the special mode, the jackpot is based on the first special symbol, and after the jackpot is completed, the effect mode is shifted in the same manner as in the normal mode.
Further, in the special mode, when the number of games (the number of games of the special symbol game) is exhausted 30 times, the effect mode is shifted from the special mode to the normal mode.

The first special mode is an effect mode in which the non-probability game state or the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state (the number of time reductions is any of "30", "50", and "100"). In the first special mode, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is in the time-saving game state, but it is difficult to identify whether or not the game is in the probabilistic game state.
In the first special mode, a big hit is made based on the second special symbol, and after the big hit is completed, the first special mode may be switched to another production mode, the details of which will be described later.
Further, in the first special mode, when the time saving game state ends, the effect mode is shifted from the first special mode to the normal mode.

The second special mode is an effect mode in which the non-probability game state or the probability change game state and the time reduction game state (the number of time reductions is "100"). In the second special mode, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is in the time-saving game state, but it is difficult to identify whether or not the game is in the probabilistic game state.
Since the effect of the second special mode is an effect performed when the time reduction number of times is given 100 times, according to the effect of the second special mode, the player is given 100 times of the time reduction number of times. It is recognizable.
Since the production of the first special mode can be performed even when the time reduction number of times is given 100 times, the player expects that the time reduction number of times is given 100 times even in the first special mode. it can.
In the second special mode, the jackpot is based on the second special symbol, and after the jackpot is completed, the second special mode may be switched to another production mode, the details of which will be described later.
Further, in the second special mode, when the time saving game state ends, the effect mode is shifted from the second special mode to the normal mode.

The third special mode is an effect mode in which the non-probability game state or the probability change game state and the time reduction game state (the number of time reductions is "100"). When the effect mode of the game state before the transition to the jackpot of the second special symbol is the third special mode, the effect of the content advantageous to the player (notification in a broader sense) is performed in this jackpot. That is, the third special mode is an effect mode characterized in that it relates to the interests of the player. More specifically, if the player can obtain a larger number of time reductions, and if the number of time reductions that can be granted is the same, the content that encourages V prizes is produced. Will be done.
In the third special mode, the jackpot is based on the second special symbol, and after the jackpot is completed, the third special mode may be switched to another production mode, the details of which will be described later.
Further, in the third special mode, when the time saving game state ends, the effect mode is shifted from the third special mode to the normal mode.

Next, in any of the normal mode, the first special mode to the third special mode, a jackpot based on the second special symbol (one of the jackpots of "probability variation jackpot 5" to "probability variation jackpot 9") is obtained, and the jackpot is The production mode that is shifted after the end will be described.

(In the case of "probability change jackpot 5" or "probability variation jackpot 6")
When the number of time reductions given in the jackpot is 30 or 50 times, the effect mode is shifted to the first special mode (* condition 3). When the number of time reductions given in the jackpot is 100 times, basically, the production mode is shifted to the first special mode with a probability of 9/10 (* condition 3), and a probability of 1/10. Moves to the 3rd special mode (* Condition 4). However, if the production mode before the jackpot transition is the third special mode and 100 times are given as the number of time reductions, the mode is forcibly shifted to the third special mode (* condition 4). Further, when the time reduction number of times is not given in the big hit, the effect mode is shifted to the normal mode.

(In the case of "Probability change jackpot 7")
After the jackpot ends, the production mode is basically shifted to the first special mode with a probability of 1/10 (* condition 5) and to the second special mode with a probability of 7/10 (* condition). 6) There is a 2/10 chance of shifting to the third special mode (* condition 7). However, if the production mode before the start of the big hit is the third special mode, the mode is forcibly shifted to the third special mode (* condition 7). In addition, when the number of time reductions is not given in the jackpot, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode.
The transition rate of the effect mode is not limited to the above-mentioned value. For example, the transition ratio may be set so as to forcibly shift to the second special mode.

(In the case of "probability change jackpot 8" or "probability variation jackpot 9")
If the number of time reductions given in the jackpot is 100, the effect mode is shifted to the second special mode with a probability of 1/10 (* condition 8), and the third special mode has a probability of 9/10. (* Condition 9). In addition, when the number of time reductions is not given in the jackpot, the effect mode shifts to the normal mode.
It should be noted that the effect mode before the start of the big hit is the third special mode, and even if 100 times are given as the number of time reductions in the big hit, the above-mentioned transition ratio is the same. Further, the transition rate of the effect mode is not limited to the above-mentioned value. For example, when 100 times are given as the number of time reductions in the big hit, the transition ratio may be set so as to forcibly shift to the second special mode.

[Control by main CPU and sub CPU]
Next, the processes executed by the main CPU 61 and the sub CPU 71 of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described below with reference to FIGS. 64 to 77. 64 to 69 show the processing by the main CPU 61, and FIGS. 70 to 77 show the processing by the sub CPU 71. The description of the same or similar process as that shown in the first embodiment will be simplified or omitted as appropriate.

The main CPU 61 includes a game state transition control means, a probability change game state control means, a non-probability change game state control means, a number of times determination means, a time saving game state control means, a non-time reduction game state control means, and a round game execution means (first round game). Various means such as an execution means and a second round game execution means) are realized.
For example, the main CPU 61 functions as a game state transition control means capable of controlling the transition to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player, provided that the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode. Further, for example, in the big hit game state, the main CPU 61 obtains identification information in a specific mode after the end of the big hit game state based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the round game executed by the round game execution means. It functions as a probabilistic game state control means that can control a probabilistic game state in which the probability of displaying a stop is relatively high. Further, for example, the main CPU 61 identifies in a specific mode after the end of the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game medium did not pass through the specific area in the round game executed by the round game execution means in the jackpot game state. It functions as a non-probability changing game state control means that can control a non-probability changing game state in which the probability that information is stopped and displayed is relatively low. Further, for example, the main CPU 61 functions as a number-of-times determining means capable of determining any number of times from a plurality of times. Further, for example, the main CPU 61 functions as a time-saving game state control means capable of controlling a time-saving game state including a state in which the opening / closing member is relatively likely to be opened after the end of the big hit game state. Further, for example, in the main CPU 61, the opening / closing member is in a relatively open state on condition that the number of times the identification information is variablely displayed after being controlled to the time saving gaming state becomes the number of times determined by the number of times determining means. It functions as a non-time-saving game state control means that can control a non-time-saving game state including a state in which it is difficult to become.

[Timer update process]
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a timer update process executed by the main CPU 61. The timer update process of FIG. 64 is composed of substantially the same steps as the timer update process of FIG. 20, except that the timer update process of the first embodiment is not provided with the process of S80 of the first embodiment. This is because, in the present embodiment, the rounds that can be won are not fixed.
That is, when the main CPU 61 makes an affirmative determination in the determination process of S1007 or makes an affirmative determination in the determination process of S1009, the control state flag is a value indicating the process during the opening of the large winning opening in S1010 ( 04H) Performs a process of determining whether or not it is.

[Special symbol related switch check processing]
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a special symbol-related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol-related switch check process of FIG. 65 is composed of substantially the same steps as the special symbol-related switch check process of FIG. 22, but in the present special symbol-related switch check process, the process of S103 of the first embodiment is provided. The difference is that it is not. This is because the second major winning opening 37A is not provided in the present embodiment.
That is, when the main CPU 61 ends the first winning opening switch check process of S1022, the main CPU 61 ends this special symbol-related switch check process routine.

[1st prize opening switch check process]
FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a first large winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The first large winning opening switch check process of FIG. 66 is composed of substantially the same steps as the first large winning opening switch check process of FIG. 25, but in the first large winning opening switch check process, the first embodiment The timing of performing the processing of S135 and the determination content of the determination processing of S136 are different. Regarding the processing timing, in the present embodiment, the specific area passing command is not supplied to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 at the time of a small hit. On the other hand, the content of the judgment is a change due to the elimination of the probability variation control at the time of a small hit.
That is, in S1035, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the large winning opening opening counter is "1" or more. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is "1" or more, it shifts the process to S1036 and determines that the value of the large winning opening opening counter is not "1" or more. The process is transferred to S1042.
Further, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a fixed area passage command in S1041 after completing the process of S1040. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1042.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol display time management process of FIG. 66 is composed of substantially the same steps as the special symbol display time management process of FIG. 31, but in the present special symbol display time management process, the processing content of S230 of the first embodiment is different.
That is, in S1060, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting (storing, etc.) a game state command in the main RAM 63. The game state command is the type of command (information indicating that it is a game state command), information indicating the game state (non-probability / non-time reduction, probabilistic / non-time reduction, non-probability / time reduction, probabilistic / time reduction), and the number of probable changes. This is a command including information indicating the remaining number of times (“0”) and information indicating the remaining number of times (“0”, “20”, or “70”) as the number of time reductions. The game state command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the status of the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1061.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a process during opening of the large winning opening executed by the main CPU 61. The processing during opening of the large winning opening in FIG. 68 is composed of substantially the same steps as the processing during opening of the large winning opening in FIG. 34, but in the processing during opening of the large winning opening, the processing of S276 of the first embodiment is provided. The difference is that it is not. This is because the second major winning opening 37A is not provided in the present embodiment.
That is, when the main CPU 61 finishes the process of setting the predetermined value in the residual ball monitoring timer in S1075, the process shifts to S1076.

[Hit end interval management process]
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a hit end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit end interval management process of FIG. 69 is composed of substantially the same steps as the hit end interval management process of FIG. 35, but in the hit end interval management process of FIG. 69, S295, S296, and S300 of the first embodiment. The processing content is different.
That is, in S1095, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting "30" as the number of STs in the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63. The value to be set is not limited to "30", and other values may be adopted. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1096.
In S1096, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value (any one of "0", "30", "50", and "100") as the number of time reductions in the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 63. .. More specifically, the main CPU 61 determines a predetermined value based on the type of big hit (big hit symbol), the game state before the big hit transition, and the presence or absence of V winning, using the game state determination table shown in FIG. 62. To do. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1097.
Further, in S1100, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a predetermined value (any one of "0", "30", "50", and "100") to the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 63. Since this process is the same as the process of S1096, the description thereof will be omitted. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1101.

[Timer update process]
FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a timer update process executed by the sub CPU 71. The timer update process of FIG. 70 is composed of substantially the same steps as the timer update process of FIG. 40, but the process content of S357 of the first embodiment is different in this timer update process.
That is, the sub CPU 71 performs the launch notification flag setting process in S1117 to switch the launch notification mode. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 sets "02H" when the current value is "01H", sets "04H" when the current value is "03H", and sets the current value. If the value is "04H", set "03H". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1118. The launch notification flag is a flag that allows the sub CPU 71 to identify whether or not to notify the launch of the game ball. In the case of "00H", the notification is not performed (finished), and other than "00H". In the case of, the notification will be given (continued).
In the present embodiment, when the value of the launch notification flag is "01H", the "first half part" is notified, and when the value of the launch notification flag is "02H", the "second half part" is notified and fired. When the value of the notification flag is "03H", a notification ("DANGER", "Please wait", etc.) suggesting that the firing operation is stopped is performed, and when the value of the firing notification flag is "04H", the firing operation is started. Suggestive notifications (“right-handed”, “hit ~ !!”, etc.) are performed, and when the value of the launch notification flag is “05H”, “right-handed” notification is performed.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process executed by the sub CPU 71. The command analysis process of FIG. 71 is composed of substantially the same steps as the command analysis process of FIG. 41, but the command analysis process does not provide the first effect mode change process of S364 of the first embodiment. The processing content of S366 is different. In this command analysis process, the name of the second effect mode change process of S378 of the first embodiment is changed to "effect mode change process" by not providing the first effect mode change process (S1137).
That is, the sub CPU 71 performs the stop symbol determination process in S1125. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines the stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. When the stop decoration symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this processing is completed, the command analysis processing routine is terminated.

The decorative symbols to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numbers "1" to "9", and the number of these decorative symbols (numbers) is a predetermined number (for example, three (3 (3)). When the digits)) are aligned with the same decorative pattern (number), the game basically shifts to the jackpot game state.
More specifically, "Probability 1" to "Probability 4" as the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol, "Probability 5" to "Probability 9" as the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol, and "Probability variation 9" as the small hit symbol. Regarding "small hit 1", the decorative symbols corresponding to "probability change 7" are the alignment of the numbers "7", the decoration corresponding to "probability change 1" to "probability change 6", "probability change 8", and "probability change 9". The symbol is any of the numbers "1" to "6", "8", or "9", and the decorative symbol corresponding to "small hit 1" is the number "-this" as a combination of specific symbols. The decorative patterns corresponding to the specific rolls and losses that are "-" are different from the specific rolls. The stop symbol does not have to correspond to the specific symbol.
As described above, the decorative symbols corresponding to each of "probability variation 1" to "probability variation 6", "probability variation 8", and "probability variation 9" are the numbers "1" to "6", "8", or "probability variation 9". By configuring any of the 9's alignments to be acceptable, if the decorative symbols of the alignments other than the 7's alignment stop, the stop symbols will be displayed as "Probability change 1" to "Probability change 1" to ". It is not possible to know which of the big hits, "Probability 6", "Probability 8", and "Probability 9".

[Hit effect pattern determination process]
FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit effect pattern determination process of FIG. 72 is composed of substantially the same steps as the hit effect pattern determination process of FIG. 42, but the process content of S390 of the first embodiment is different in the main hit effect pattern determination process.
That is, the sub CPU 71 executes the hit effect pattern type determination process in S1150. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets any of "01H" to "05H" in the hit effect pattern flag according to the stop symbol designation information of the special symbol included in the received hit start display command. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1151. Here, "01H" corresponds to "probability change 1" to "probability change 4", "02H" corresponds to "probability change 5" and "probability change 6", "03H" corresponds to "probability change 7", and "probability change 7". "04H" corresponds to "probability variation 8" and "probability variation 9", and "05H" corresponds to "small hit 1".

[V prize notification processing]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the V winning notification process executed by the sub CPU 71. This V winning notification process is a process for notifying the V winning, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 73, in S1160, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning flag is “01H”. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is "01H", the sub CPU 71 ends the V winning notification processing routine. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning flag is not "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1161.

In S1161, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the V winning notification flag. The V prize notification flag is an internal flag indicating whether or not the V prize notification has been performed. When the V prize notification is performed, "01H" is set as the value of the V prize notification flag, and when the V prize notification is not performed, "00H" is set as the value of the V prize notification flag. To. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1162.

In S1162, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "05H" to the value of the launch notification flag. By this process, the notification "right-handed" corresponding to "05H" is performed in the process of S1180 in FIG. 74. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1163.

In S1163, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the firing notification timer. When this process is completed, the V winning notification processing routine is terminated.

[Direction processing during the round]
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the effect processing during the round executed by the sub CPU 71. The effect processing during this round is a process for determining the effect content for each round, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 74, in S1170, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the round counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1171.

In S1171, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is "01H". In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the V prize has been notified. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1180. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is not "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1172.

In S1172, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "01H". In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a "small hit 1". When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1180. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1173.

In S1173, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the round counter is "1" or "8". In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the V winning round is in progress (1st R or 8R). When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the round counter is "1" or "8", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1174. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the round counter is neither "1" nor "8", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1179.

In S1174, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "05H". In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect mode before the jackpot transition is the third special mode. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is "05H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the process to S1175. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is not "05H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1177.

In S1175, the sub CPU 71 sets the launch notification flag to "03H" or "04H". More specifically, the sub CPU 71 sets the value of the firing notification flag according to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. For example, if the first half part has a larger number of time reductions, "04H" is set, and if the second half part has a larger number of time reductions, "03H" is set. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1176. If both are the same, "03H" is set to encourage V winning, but if fraud is detected (radio wave detection, magnetic detection, etc.), "04H" is set. By doing so, it may be configured to be disadvantageous to the fraudster.

In S1176, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value to the value of the firing notification timer. For example, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to Y seconds (15 seconds), which is shorter than X seconds (18 seconds), which is the time from the start of the first opening to the long opening in which the V prize can be won. .. The predetermined value Y seconds related to the launch notification time is set in view of reaching the substantially central portion of the rolling region 372 within 2 to 2.1 seconds from the start of "right-handed" (start of the launch operation), for example. It is a thing. For example, if the firing operation is performed according to the "right-handed" displayed after 15 seconds have passed, about 2 seconds later, the first big winning opening has not been opened for a long time, and the game ball is basically. , Reach the rolling region 372. That is, the game ball "right-handed" according to the notification performed with the launch notification time is not detected by the first large winning opening first count switch 360A, but is not detected by the first large winning opening second count switch 360B. Can be detected. Further, since the firing interval of the game balls is 0.66 seconds, when the game balls are continuously fired, a plurality of game balls reach the rolling region 372, and the first large winning opening second It can be detected by the count switch 360B. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1180. The present embodiment is not limited to the above-mentioned processing, and may be a value larger than or smaller than the above-mentioned value “15”. However, it is preferable to set the time so that the round does not end before winning the V prize. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, a section in which the open state is 0.1 s or less is short-open, a section in which the open state is longer than 0.1 s and less than 14 s is middle open, and a section in which the open state is 14 s or more. Is called long opening.

In S1177, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the launch notification flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1178.

In S1178, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value to the value of the firing notification timer. Since this process is the same as the process of S1176, the description thereof will be omitted. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1180.

In S1179, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "05H" to the value of the launch notification flag. Since the second to seventh rounds are only the first half part, the value "05H" indicating a right-handed hit is set. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1180.

In S1180, the sub CPU 71 sets the hit effect pattern and the effect data during the round according to the round. In addition, in order to recognize the hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern, but the same effect pattern may be executed. When this process is completed, the effect processing routine during the round is terminated.

[Inter-round production processing]
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an inter-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. In the inter-round effect processing of FIG. 75, the processing contents of S420, S421, and S422 of the first embodiment are mainly different. In S1190 to S1192, it is a process for temporarily ending the current launch notification when the V prize has not been won.
In S1190, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the V winning notification flag is "01H". When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1193. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the V winning notification flag is not "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1191.

In S1191, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the launch notification flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1192.

In S1192, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the firing notification timer. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1193.

[Hit end production process]
FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a hit end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This hit end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in the hit end interval at the end of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 76, in S1200, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the launch notification flag to “01H”. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1201.

In S1201, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting the value of the firing notification timer to "0". When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1202.

In S1202, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" to the value of the round counter. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1203.

In S1203, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the V winning notification flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1204.

In S1204, the sub CPU 71 sets the hit effect pattern and the hit end effect data according to the round. In addition, in order to recognize the ending hit state from the effect, it is preferable to execute a different effect pattern for each value of the hit effect pattern, but the same effect pattern may be executed. When this process is completed, the hit end effect processing routine is terminated.

[Production mode change process]
FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an effect mode change process executed by the sub CPU 71. This effect mode change process is a process for changing the effect mode, and is executed in the following step units.

As shown in FIG. 77, in S1210, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “00H”. In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the game state command is based on the time saving and / or the probability change. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "00H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1211. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "00H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1213.

In S1211, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the number of remaining time reductions indicated by the game state command is 1 or more. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is "01H", the sub CPU 71 ends the effect mode change processing routine. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the effect mode flag is not "01H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1212.

In S1212, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the effect mode flag. By this process, the effect mode is shifted to the normal mode. When this process is completed, the effect mode change process routine is terminated.

In S1213, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "05H". In other words, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the "small hit 1" has ended. When the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "05H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1216. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "05H", the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S1214.

In S1214, the sub CPU 71 performs the effect mode transition determination process. More specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not to shift the effect mode based on at least one of the time reduction number of times (time reduction number of times) and the current effect mode (effect mode before a big hit). In the following, the transition of the effect mode based on the number of times of shortening the time and the effect mode before the big hit will be described.

(Time reduction = 0, regardless of production mode)
The sub CPU 71 determines that the mode shifts to the special mode when the jackpot of the first special symbol ends, and determines that the mode shifts to the normal mode when the jackpot of the second special symbol ends.

(Time reduction number = "30" or "50", regardless of production mode)
The sub CPU 71 determines that the mode shifts to the first special mode when either the end of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the end of the jackpot of the second special symbol.

(Time reduction number = "100", in normal mode)
When the big hit of the first special symbol "probability variation 3" is completed, the sub CPU 71 determines that the mode shifts to the first special mode with a probability of "9/10", and has a probability of "1/10". 2 It is determined to shift to the special mode. Further, when the big hit of the second special symbol is completed, the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the third special mode.

(Time reduction number = "100", in the case of the third special mode)
If the sub CPU 71 is either the end of the jackpot of the second special symbol "probability variation 8" or the end of the jackpot of the second special symbol "probability variation 9", the sub CPU 71 has a probability of "1/10" for the second special. It is determined to shift to the mode, and it is determined to shift to the third special mode with a probability of "9/10". Further, if the sub CPU 71 is neither the end of the jackpot of the second special symbol "probability variation 8" nor the end of the jackpot of the second special symbol "probability variation 9", the sub CPU 71 determines to shift to the third special mode. ..

(Time saving number = "100", 1st special mode, 2nd special mode, or special mode)
When the big hit of the first special symbol "probability variation 3" is completed, the sub CPU 71 determines that the mode shifts to the first special mode with a probability of "9/10", and has a probability of "1/10". 2 It is determined to shift to the special mode.
If the sub CPU 71 is either the end of the jackpot of the second special symbol "probability variation 5" or the end of the jackpot of the second special symbol "probability variation 6", the sub CPU 71 has a probability of "9/10" for the second special. It is determined to shift to the mode, and it is determined to shift to the third special mode with a probability of "1/10".
When the big hit of the second special symbol "probability variation 7" is completed, the sub CPU 71 determines that the mode shifts to the first special mode with a probability of "1/10", and has a probability of "7/10". 2 It is determined to shift to the special mode, and it is determined to shift to the third special mode with a probability of "2/10".
If the sub CPU 71 is either the end of the jackpot of the second special symbol "probability variation 8" or the end of the jackpot of the second special symbol "probability variation 9", the sub CPU 71 has a probability of "1/10" for the second special. It is determined to shift to the mode, and it is determined to shift to the third special mode with a probability of "9/10".
In the present embodiment, the probability related to the mode transition is shown as "x / y", but the probability is realized by performing a predetermined random number lottery.

In S1215, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value according to the determination result to the value of the effect mode flag. When this process is completed, the process is transferred to S1216.

In S1216, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When this process is completed, the effect mode change process routine is terminated.

The sub CPU 71 realizes various means such as an effect mode determining means and an effect execution means.

78 and 79 are diagrams showing an example of the effect screen and the effect screen flow. In the following, when the production mode is shifted in the order of normal mode, special mode, and normal mode (first case), and when the production mode is shifted in the order of normal mode, first special mode, third special mode, and normal mode (second case). Case) will be taken as an example to explain the characteristic production of this embodiment.
SC101 to SC144 are effect contents displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the components on the screen are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

(First case)
SC101 shows a mode in which the decorative pattern is fluctuating in the normal mode. In this example, since the lottery for the jackpot of the first special symbol was won, after that, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped (SC102), and the fact that the jackpot has been achieved is displayed on the screen (SC103), and the jackpot of the first special symbol is related. The production is performed (SC104 to SC1110).
In this case, since the number of time reductions was not given in the jackpot (the number of time reductions is 0), the effect mode was changed from the normal mode to the special mode, and the screen was changed to the special mode ("Special mode"). "Rush" etc.) is produced (SC111).
After that, the game progresses, the number of games (the number of games of the special symbol game) is exhausted 30 times (SC112 to SC113), the production mode is changed from the special mode to the normal mode (SC114), and the game is performed in the normal mode. (SC115).

(Second case)
SC101 to SC110 are the same as in the first case. In this case, 30 times are given as the number of time reductions in the jackpot of the first special symbol, so that the effect mode is shifted from the normal mode to the first special mode. On the screen, an effect indicating that the mode has been shifted to the first special mode (“entering the first special mode”, etc.) is performed (SC116).

After that, the game progresses and becomes a big hit of "probability change 8" (SC117 to SC120), and the production is performed at the big hit (SC121 to SC125). In the jackpot, more accurately, in the jackpots of "probability change 8" and "probability change 9", which have a high rate of transition to the third special mode, a V prize can be won at the 8th round, and a specific hit at the 7th round before that. The production ("Next round, grab the time saving with your own power", etc.) will be performed (SC123).
Further, in the jackpot, since V winning is possible in the latter half part of the 8th R, notification (“first half part”, “second half part”, etc.) regarding the timing at which V winning is possible is performed (SC124, SC125).

Generally, when the player grasps that the "first half part" is being produced on the screen, the number of winning balls reaches 10 and the round ends. In order to avoid it, we will refrain from firing (winning) the game ball, and when the production of the "second half part" is performed, we will fire the game ball and aim for the V prize.
However, in the jackpot, 0 or 100 times are determined as the number of time reductions based on the gaming state before the jackpot transition and the presence or absence of the V prize, so that the player knows the gaming state before the transition. Based on this, it is decided whether or not to aim for the V prize and the game is played.
According to this configuration, the player's own judgment leads to the acquisition of profit (in this example, the number of time reductions), so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In this example, by winning a V prize, 100 times are obtained as the number of time reductions, and since the predetermined lottery is won, the production of "V" is performed on the screen (SC126), and the production mode is changed from the first special mode to the third. It shifts to the special mode (SC127).
After that, the game progresses and becomes a big hit of "Probability Change 7" (SC128 to SC131), and the production is performed at the big hit (SC132 to SC135). In the big hit of "Probability change 7", 100 times are given as the number of time reductions regardless of the game state before the big hit, so that the effect of encouraging the V prize is performed at the 8th R where the V prize is possible. In other words, in the first half part where V prize is not won (V prize is difficult), the production to refrain from winning ("DANGER", "Please wait", etc.) is performed, and in the second half part where V prize is easy, the production to encourage prize ("DANGER", "Please wait", etc.) "Right hit", "hit- !!", etc.) are performed.
In this example, since the V prize is won, the game is in a probabilistic / short-time game state. In the jackpot of "Probability Change 7", if the production mode before the jackpot is the third special mode, the third special mode is forcibly set (in other words, the third special mode is maintained). ).

After that, the game progresses and becomes a big hit of "probability change 9" (SC137 to SC140), and the production is performed at the big hit (SC141 to SC143). In the big hit, the player ignores the effect and plays the game (in other words, because he wins a V prize), so that the effect mode is shifted from the third special mode to the normal mode (SC144).

Here, in the present embodiment, the number of time reductions is determined based on the game state determination table of FIG. 62. Looking at the big hit of "Probability change 9" in the game state determination table, if the game state before the big hit transition is the probability change / time saving game state, the time saving number is not given when V is won in the big hit. If you do not win the V prize, 100 times will be given as the number of time reductions. On the other hand, looking at the effect mode, in the jackpot of "Probability Change 9", when the game state before the transition to the jackpot is the probability change / time saving game state and the production mode is the third special mode, the time saving number of times is not given. In that case, the mode is shifted to the normal mode, and when 100 times are given as the number of time reductions, the third special mode is maintained. In other words, in the jackpot of "Probability Change 9", if a V prize is won, the number of time reductions is not given, the production mode is shifted to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player, and if the V prize is not won, The number of time reductions is 100 times, and the third special mode is maintained, which is advantageous for the player.

In the present embodiment, in the 8th round of the jackpot, it is difficult (impossible) to win a V in the first half part, and it is easy (possible) to win a V in the second half part. Therefore, in this example, the first half part is urged to launch a game ball (“right hit”, “hit- !!”, etc.) (SC141), and the second half part is a game ball so as not to win a V prize. ("DANGER", "Please wait for a while", etc.) will be performed (SC142).
However, since the player has made the V prize, the effect of winning the V is performed (SC143), and the effect of shifting the effect mode from the third special mode to the normal mode is performed (SC144).

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, another aspect (modification example) of the winning device mechanism in the second embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80 (a), the first aspect of the winning device mechanism is the first winning opening first count switch 360A, the first winning opening second count switch 360B, the first winning opening shutter 361A, and the first. It is realized by including one large winning opening shutter 361B, a second large winning opening shutter 371A, a rolling region 372, a specific region 38A, a non-specific region 38B, discharge ports 38X, 38Y, and a displacement member 39.
Here, each shutter (first prize opening shutter 361A, first prize opening shutter 361B, and second prize opening shutter 371A) is opened and closed (driven) according to the pattern shown in FIG. 61. At this time, the first large winning opening shutter 361A and the first large winning opening shutter 361B simultaneously open and close (drive) when opening and closing the first large winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B, and the second large winning opening shutter 361B. The winning opening shutter 371A performs an opening / closing operation when opening / closing the second large winning opening 37A.
It differs from the winning device mechanism of FIG. 57 in that the second large winning opening shutter 371A is provided. Since the second big winning opening shutter 371A is provided, when the second big winning opening shutter 371A is open, the game ball passes through the second big winning opening 37A and is on the back side of the main winning device mechanism. Be guided. Further, in the main winning device mechanism, for example, the second large winning opening and the first large winning opening are controlled in the open state in this order, and one of the first large winning opening and the second large winning opening is closed. If the time from the displacement to the open state of the other is set to an extremely short time (for example, 0.1 second) and the "right-handed" is started after the big hit starts, the first big winning opening 1st By being detected by the count switch 360A or the switch that detects the game ball that has won the second prize opening (not shown), it becomes extremely difficult to detect by the first prize opening second count switch 360B and to pass through the specific area 38. It may be configured to be. Since the other parts have the same configuration as the winning device mechanism shown in FIG. 57, the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 80 (b), the second aspect of the winning device mechanism is realized by including the same components as the winning device mechanism of the first aspect. 1st big winning opening 1st count switch 360A, 1st big winning opening 2nd count switch 360B, 1st big winning opening shutter 361A, 1st big winning opening shutter 361B, 2nd big winning opening shutter 371A, rolling area 372 The arrangement of the above is the same as that of the first aspect, but the arrangement of the specific area 38A, the non-specific area 38B, the discharge ports 38X, 38Y, and the displacement member 39 is different. In this winning device mechanism, the displacement member 39, the specific area 38A, and the discharge port 38X are sequentially provided on the left side of the lowermost partition, and the non-specific area 38B and the discharge port 38Y are sequentially provided on the right side of the partition. ing.
In the prize-winning device mechanism, an inclined portion 410 is provided so that the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening first count switch 360A can pass through the specific area 38A. That is, the winning mechanism is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 38A regardless of whether it passes through the first large winning opening 36A or the first large winning opening 36B. As for the length and angle of the inclined portion 410, an appropriate configuration can be adopted as long as a configuration capable of passing through the specific region 38A can be realized. Further, the opening / closing operation (driving) of each shutter (first prize opening shutter 361A, first prize opening shutter 361B, and second prize opening shutter 371A) is the same as in FIG. 80 (b). The explanation is omitted.

<Effects obtained by the above configuration>
According to the above-described configuration, for example, in the game state determination table, the number of time reductions after the end of the big hit is defined according to the big hit symbol and the game state before the shift to the big hit (FIG. 62). However, in a broader sense, the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot may be specified according to the jackpot symbol. For example, a specific jackpot game state may be provided, and if a V prize is won in the jackpot game state, 0 times are given as the number of time reductions, and if V is not won, 30 times are given as the number of time reductions. That is, in this big hit game state, when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the first number of times (for example, 0 times) is determined as the number of times that the benefit of the time-saving game state can be enjoyed, and the game ball passes through the specific area 38A. If not, the second number of times (for example, 30 times), which is larger than the first number of times, can be determined. Therefore, even if the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A after the end of the jackpot game state, the time-saving game state of the second number of times is shortened. Can be enjoyed. In this way, the interest is improved by providing a possibility that the case where the game ball does not pass through the specific area 38A is more advantageous than the case where the game ball passes through the specific area 38A. be able to.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, when the game state before the transition to the jackpot game state of "probability change 1" is the non-probability change / non-time saving game state, the game ball passes through the specific area 38A. , The first number of times (for example, 0 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, the second number of times (for example, 30 times), which is larger than the first number of times, is determined (see FIG. 62 and the like). On the other hand, when the game state before the transition to the jackpot game state of "probability change 1" is the probability change / non-time saving game state, if the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the second number of times (for example, 30). If the number of times is determined and there is no passage, the first number of times (for example, 0 times) less than the second number is determined. In this way, in determining the number of times related to the time-saving game state, it is advantageous to take into account the game state before the transition to the jackpot game state of "probability change 1" in addition to the presence or absence of the game ball passing through the specific area 38A. Since it is possible to eliminate the situation where the degree is extremely low, it is possible to further improve the interest. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the second number of times is determined, and when there is no passage, the first number of times less than the second number of times may be determined, and the specific area 38A may be determined. Since it is not always the case that the case where the game ball does not pass is more advantageous than the case where the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, it is possible to provide a novel game property.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 1" and the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 2" in which the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device have the same or substantially the same displacement mode are provided. (FIGS. 58 to 61, etc.), it is difficult for the player to determine which jackpot game state is in the variable winning device from the displacement mode.
Further, in the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 1", when the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 1" is the non-probability variation / non-time saving gaming state, the passage of the game ball to the specific area 38A If there is, the first number of times (for example, 0 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, the second number of times (for example, 30 times) is determined, which is larger than the first number of times. On the other hand, in the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 2", when the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 2" is the non-probability variation / non-time saving gaming state, the passage of the game ball to the specific area 38A If there is, the second number of times (for example, 30 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, the first number of times (for example, 0 times) less than the second number of times is determined.
That is, by providing the big hit game state of "probability change 1" and the big hit game state of "probability change 2", even if the result of passing the game ball to the specific area 38A is the same, the time saving game state that can be enjoyed. The benefits (eg, number of times, duration) can be different.
Therefore, the profit of the time-saving gaming state that can be enjoyed by the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 1" and the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 2" can be adjusted, so that the interest can be further improved. In addition, since it is difficult for the player to determine which jackpot game state is in the displacement mode of the variable winning device, the player is assigned to the specific area 38A so that the benefit of the time-saving game state that can be enjoyed is always large. Since it becomes impossible to select whether or not to pass the game ball, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is extremely advantageous and the game store is extremely disadvantageous.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, when the game state before the transition to the jackpot game state of "probability change 1" is the probability change / time saving game state, when the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the first One number of times (for example, 30 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, a second number of times (for example, 50 times) larger than the first number of times is determined. In other words, the jackpot of "Probability Change 1" is more than the case of shifting from the state of the probability change / short-time game state to the jackpot game state of "Profit Change 1" and shifting to the jackpot game state of "Profit Change 1". In the case of shifting to the non-probability changing gaming state after the end of the gaming state, more benefits of the time-saving gaming state can be enjoyed, so that a situation in which the degree of advantage becomes extremely high can be avoided.

In the above-described configuration, for example, in the game state determination table, the number of time reductions after the end of the big hit is defined according to the big hit symbol and the game state before the shift to the big hit (FIG. 62). However, in a broader sense, the number of time reductions after the end of the jackpot may be defined according to the jackpot symbol and whether or not the gaming state before the jackpot transition is the probabilistic gaming state. For example, if a specific jackpot gaming state is provided and the gaming state before the jackpot transition is a probabilistic gaming state, the time reduction is 30 times when a V prize is won in the jackpot game state, and the time is shortened when the V prize is not won. 50 times is given as the number of times, and when the game state before the big hit transition is the non-probability changing game state, the time reduction number is 50 times when the V prize is won in the big hit game state, and the time reduction number is when the V prize is not won. 30 times may be given.
That is, when the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state and the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, the first number of times (for example, 30 times) is determined and passed. If there is no, the second number (for example, 50 times), which is larger than the first number, is determined. On the other hand, when the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state is the non-probability changing gaming state, if the gaming ball passes through the specific area 38A, the fourth number (for example, 50 times) is determined. If there is no passage, a third number (eg, 30), which is less than the fourth, is determined. In this way, in determining the number of times related to the time-saving game state, in addition to whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A, the game state before the transition to the big hit game state is taken into consideration, and the game is enjoyed after the end of the big hit game state. By making it possible to change the time-saving game state to be obtained, it is possible to improve the interest.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 1" and the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 2" in which the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device have the same or substantially the same displacement mode are provided. (FIGS. 58 to 61, etc.), it is difficult for the player to determine which jackpot game state is in the variable winning device from the displacement mode.
Further, for example, in the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 1", when the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 1" is the probability variation game state, the game ball has passed to the specific area 38A. In the case, the first number of times (for example, 30 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, the second number of times (for example, 50 times), which is larger than the first number of times, is determined. On the other hand, in the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 2", when the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 2" is the probability variation gaming state, if the game ball passes through the specific area 38A, The second number of times (for example, 50 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, the first number of times (for example, 30 times) is determined.
Further, in the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 1", when the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 1" is the non-probability variation game state, the game ball passes through the specific area 38A. , The fourth number (for example, 50 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, the third number (for example, 30 times), which is less than the fourth number, is determined. On the other hand, in the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 2", when the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state of "probability variation 2" is the non-probability variation game state, the game ball passes through the specific area 38A. , The third number (for example, 30 times) is determined, and if there is no passage, the fourth number (for example, 50 times) is determined.
In this way, even if the result of passing the game ball to the specific area 38A is the same, the profit that can enjoy the time-saving game state can be adjusted according to the type of the jackpot game state, and the situation where the game becomes monotonous is eliminated. Since it is obtained, it is possible to further improve the interest. Further, even if the player knows whether or not the gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state is the probability changing gaming state, the player can detect which jackpot gaming state is from the displacement mode of the variable winning device. Since it is difficult to do so, it becomes impossible to select whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area 38A so that the profit that can be enjoyed in the short-time game state is always large, so that the player becomes extremely advantageous and the game store becomes extremely advantageous. You can avoid a situation that is extremely disadvantageous.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, if the effect mode before the transition to the jackpot game state is the third special mode, in other words, the effect mode before the transition to the jackpot game state is the third special mode, the specific area 38A is reached. Specific effects related to the number of times determined based on the passing result of the game balls (effects that encourage the launch of the game balls ("DANGER", "please wait", etc.), effects that encourage the launch of the game balls ("right-handed") , "Strike- !!", etc.)) can be performed (Fig. 79, etc.). According to this configuration, the player who grasps the number of times determined based on the passing result of the game ball to the specific area 38A by the specific effect can enjoy more times related to the time-saving game state, so that the specific area 38A can be enjoyed more. You will be able to play games based on your own judgment as to whether or not to pass the game ball. In this way, it is possible to provide a novel game property by directly connecting the effect mode before the transition to the jackpot game state to the profit for the player.

In the above-described configuration, for example, in the jackpot game state of "probability variation 7", the fifth number of times (for example, 100 times) is determined regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the specific area 38A. In addition, when the effect mode before the transition to the jackpot game state of "Probability Change 7" is the third special mode, a specific effect that promotes the passage of the game ball to the specific area 38A (the effect of refraining from winning a prize ("DANGER","""Please wait for a while", etc.), and effects that encourage winning ("Right-handed","Hit-!!", etc.)) can be executed (Fig. 79, etc.).
With this configuration, when the player recognizes the specific effect, he / she grasps that it is in the big hit game state of "probability change 7", passes the game ball through the specific area 38A, and ends the big hit game state of "probability change 7". Later, you will be able to enjoy the probabilistic game state. In this way, by providing a specific effect that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to eliminate the situation where the game becomes monotonous, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, the game ball can pass over the first special winning opening 36A and reach the first large winning opening 36B (FIG. 57, etc.). On the other hand, the game ball can pass through the specific area 38A when it passes through the first large winning opening 36B. That is, since the first large winning opening 36A can prevent the game ball from passing through the first large winning opening 36B, it is basically possible to pass through the first large winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B for a long time. The game ball can be made to pass through the first large winning opening 36A, and it is still difficult to pass through the specific area 38A, which makes it difficult to shift to the probabilistic gaming state. In this way, in the big hit game state where it is difficult to shift to the probabilistic game state, the big hit game state is remarkably disadvantageous by allowing the first big winning opening 36A to pass for a long time and allowing many game balls to pass. Since the situation can be resolved, it is possible to improve the interest.

According to the above-described configuration, for example, the second large winning opening 37A is provided between the first large winning opening 36A and the first large winning opening 36B (FIG. 79, etc.). By providing the second large winning opening 37A in this way, when the first large winning opening 36A changes from the open state to the closed state, it goes over the first large winning opening 36A and heads toward the first large winning opening 36B. Since the game ball can pass through the second prize opening 37A, it can be prevented from passing through the first prize opening 36B. Further, in this configuration, since the game ball that has passed through the first large winning opening 36B can pass through the specific area 38A, it is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the specific area 38A and being controlled to the probabilistic gaming state. Become.

In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments, the techniques in the other embodiments can be applied to each other as long as the characteristic configuration and the essential effect are not impaired.

1 Game board 1p Game area 4 Liquid crystal display device 32 1st starting port 33 2nd starting port 34 Blade member 35 Passing gate 36A, 36B, 36C 1st big winning opening 361A, 361B, 361C 1st big winning opening Shutter 37A, 37B 2nd prize opening 371A, 371B 2nd prize opening shutter 38A specific area 38B non-specific area 39 displacement member 53 1st special symbol display 54 2nd special symbol display 61 main CPU
63 Main RAM
71 sub CPU
73 work RAM
83 Payout device

Claims (1)

A variable winning device that can be displaced into a first state in which the game medium is easily accepted and a second state in which the game medium is difficult to be accepted, and has a specific area through which the game medium can pass.
A passing area through which the game medium can pass,
An opening / closing member that can be displaced into an open state in which the game medium easily passes through the passing region and a closed state in which the game medium does not easily pass through.
A display means capable of variablely displaying the identification information based on the passage of the game medium through the passage area, and
On condition that the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in a specific mode, the game state transition control means capable of controlling the transition to the jackpot game state advantageous to the player, and the game state transition control means.
A round game executing means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning device is displaced to the first state and the second state in the jackpot game state shifted by the control of the game state transition control means.
In the jackpot game state transitioned by the control of the game state transition control means, the end of the jackpot game state is based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area in the round game executed by the round game execution means. Later, a probabilistic gaming state control means capable of controlling a probabilistic gaming state in which the probability that the identification information is stopped and displayed on the display means in the specific mode is relatively high ,
And probability that can be controlled to a relatively low non-probability variation gaming state non probability variation gaming state control means for identification information is displayed stopped in the specific embodiments prior Symbol display means,
A time reduction gaming state control means capable of controlling the time reduction gaming state including state easy pre Symbol closing member is relatively open,
Non-including a state in which the opening / closing member is relatively unlikely to be in the open state when the number of times the identification information is variablely displayed after being controlled to the time-saving game state by the time-saving game state control means reaches the first number. Non-time-saving game state control means that can control the time-saving game state,
With
When the gaming medium passes through the specific area and is controlled to the probabilistic gaming state by the probabilistic gaming state control means after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the first probabilistic gaming state and the time-saving gaming state can be controlled. It is possible and
It is possible to control the non-probability variation game state and the time-saving game state of the second number of times, which is larger than the first number of times , without the game medium passing through the specific area .
After performing the recognition difficult is directed stop table示種 another identification information from the performance, being capable of performing recognition easy is directed stop table示種by the identification information from the performance,
The same effect can be performed regardless of whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific area.
It is determined whether or not the easy-to-recognize effect is executed depending on whether or not the game medium has passed through the specific area.
In the jackpot gaming state transitioned by the control of the game state transition control means, the gaming medium is directed toward the specific region before the gaming medium passes through the specific region during the jackpot gaming state. A game machine characterized by being able to perform a specific effect that encourages the launch of.

Images